Table of Contents
- Package Contents
- Chapter 1 About This Guide
- Chapter 2 Introduction
- Chapter 3 Login to the Switch
- Chapter 4 System
- Chapter 5 Switching
- Chapter 6 VLAN
- Chapter 7 Spanning Tree
- Chapter 8 Multicast
- Chapter 9 QoS
- Chapter 10 PoE
- Chapter 11 ACL
- Chapter 12 Network Security
- Chapter 13 SNMP
- Chapter 14 Cluster
- Chapter 15 LLDP
- Chapter 16 Maintenance
- Appendix A: Specifications
- Appendix B: Load Software Using FTP
- Appendix C: Glossary
TP-Link TL-SG3210 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for TL-SG3210 by TP-Link which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P
JetStream L2 Managed Switch
R
EV3.0.1
1910011345
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of
TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Other brands and product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any
derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from TP-LINK
TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright © 2015 TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights
reserved.
http://www.tp-link.com
FCC STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CE Mark Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Продукт сертифіковано згідно с правилами системи УкрСЕПРО на відповідність вимогам
нормативних документів та вимогам, що передбачені чинними законодавчими актами
України.
I
Safety Information
When product has power button, the power button is one of the way to shut off the product;
When there is no power button, the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the
product or the power adapter from the power source.
Don’t disassemble the product, or make repairs yourself. You run the risk of electric shock and
voiding the limited warranty. If you need service, please contact us.
Avoid water and wet locations.
安全諮詢及注意事項
●請使用原裝電源供應器或只能按照本產品注明的電源類型使用本產品。
●清潔本產品之前請先拔掉電源線。請勿使用液體、噴霧清潔劑或濕布進行清潔。
●注意防潮，請勿將水或其他液體潑灑到本產品上。
●插槽與開口供通風使用，以確保本產品的操作可靠並防止過熱，請勿堵塞或覆蓋開口。
●請勿將本產品置放於靠近熱源的地方。除非有正常的通風，否則不可放在密閉位置中。
●請不要私自打開機殼，不要嘗試自行維修本產品，請由授權的專業人士進行此項工作。
此為甲類資訊技術設備，于居住環境中使用時，可能會造成射頻擾動，在此種情況下，使用者會被
要求採取某些適當的對策。
This product can be used in the following countries:
AT BG BY CA CZ DE DK EE
ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT
LT LV MT NL NO PL PT RO
RU SE SK TR UA US
II
CONTENTS
Package Contents .......................................................................................................................... 1
Chapter 1 About This Guide ......................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Intended Readers ......................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Conventions .................................................................................................................. 2
1.3 Overview of This Guide ................................................................................................ 2
Chapter 2 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Overview of the Switch ................................................................................................. 6
2.2 Appearance Description ............................................................................................... 6
2.2.1 Front Panel ........................................................................................................ 6
2.2.2 Rear Panel ......................................................................................................... 9
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch ..................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Login ........................................................................................................................... 10
3.2 Configuration .............................................................................................................. 11
Chapter 4 System ....................................................................................................................... 12
4.1 System Info ................................................................................................................. 12
4.1.1 System Summary ............................................................................................. 12
4.1.2 Device Description ........................................................................................... 14
4.1.3 System Time .................................................................................................... 14
4.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ....................................................................................... 15
4.1.5 System IP ......................................................................................................... 17
4.1.6 System IPv6 ..................................................................................................... 18
4.2 User Management ...................................................................................................... 27
4.2.1 User Table ........................................................................................................ 27
4.2.2 User Config ...................................................................................................... 27
4.3 System Tools .............................................................................................................. 29
4.3.1 Config Restore ................................................................................................. 29
4.3.2 Config Backup .................................................................................................. 29
4.3.3 Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................... 30
4.3.4 System Reboot ................................................................................................ 31
4.3.5 System Reset ................................................................................................... 31
4.4 Access Security .......................................................................................................... 31
4.4.1 Access Control ................................................................................................. 31
III
4.4.2 HTTP Config .................................................................................................... 32
4.4.3 HTTPS Config .................................................................................................. 33
4.4.4 SSH Config ...................................................................................................... 36
4.4.5 Telnet Config .................................................................................................... 42
Chapter 5 Switching .................................................................................................................... 43
5.1 Port ............................................................................................................................. 43
5.1.1 Port Config ....................................................................................................... 43
5.1.2 Port Mirror ........................................................................................................ 44
5.1.3 Port Security .................................................................................................... 47
5.1.4 Port Isolation .................................................................................................... 49
5.1.5 Loopback Detection ......................................................................................... 50
5.2 LAG ............................................................................................................................ 51
5.2.1 LAG Table ........................................................................................................ 52
5.2.2 Static LAG ........................................................................................................ 53
5.2.3 LACP Config .................................................................................................... 54
5.3 Traffic Monitor ............................................................................................................. 56
5.3.1 Traffic Summary ............................................................................................... 56
5.3.2 Traffic Statistics ................................................................................................ 57
5.4 MAC Address .............................................................................................................. 59
5.4.1 Address Table .................................................................................................. 60
5.4.2 Static Address .................................................................................................. 61
5.4.3 Dynamic Address ............................................................................................. 62
5.4.4 Filtering Address .............................................................................................. 64
Chapter 6 VLAN .......................................................................................................................... 66
6.1 802.1Q VLAN.............................................................................................................. 67
6.1.1 VLAN Config .................................................................................................... 69
6.1.2 Port Config ....................................................................................................... 71
6.2 MAC VLAN ................................................................................................................. 73
6.3 Protocol VLAN ............................................................................................................ 74
6.3.1 Protocol Group Table ....................................................................................... 77
6.3.2 Protocol Group ................................................................................................. 77
6.3.3 Protocol Template ............................................................................................ 78
6.4 Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN ....................................................................... 80
6.5 Application Example for MAC VLAN ........................................................................... 81
6.6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN ...................................................................... 82
IV
6.7 GVRP ......................................................................................................................... 84
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree ............................................................................................................ 88
7.1 STP Config ................................................................................................................. 93
7.1.1 STP Config ....................................................................................................... 93
7.1.2 STP Summary .................................................................................................. 95
7.2 Port Config .................................................................................................................. 96
7.3 MSTP Instance ........................................................................................................... 98
7.3.1 Region Config .................................................................................................. 98
7.3.2 Instance Config ................................................................................................ 99
7.3.3 Instance Port Config....................................................................................... 101
7.4 STP Security ............................................................................................................. 103
7.4.1 Port Protect .................................................................................................... 103
7.4.2 TC Protect ...................................................................................................... 105
7.5 Application Example for STP Function ..................................................................... 105
Chapter 8 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 110
8.1 IGMP Snooping ........................................................................................................ 114
8.1.1 Snooping Config ............................................................................................ 116
8.1.2 VLAN Config .................................................................................................. 116
8.1.3 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 118
8.1.4 IP-Range ........................................................................................................ 119
8.1.5 Multicast VLAN .............................................................................................. 120
8.1.6 Static Multicast IP ........................................................................................... 123
8.1.7 Packet Statistics ............................................................................................. 124
8.2 MLD Snooping .......................................................................................................... 126
8.2.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 127
8.2.2 VLAN Config .................................................................................................. 129
8.2.3 Filter Config .................................................................................................... 131
8.2.4 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 132
8.2.5 Static Multicast ............................................................................................... 132
8.2.6 Querier Config ................................................................................................ 133
8.2.7 Packet Statistics ............................................................................................. 134
8.3 Multicast Table .......................................................................................................... 136
8.3.1 IPv4 Multicast Table ....................................................................................... 136
8.3.2 IPv6 Multicast Table ....................................................................................... 137
V
Chapter 9 QoS .......................................................................................................................... 138
9.1 DiffServ ..................................................................................................................... 141
9.1.1 Port Priority .................................................................................................... 141
9.1.2 DSCP Priority ................................................................................................. 142
9.1.3 802.1P/CoS mapping ..................................................................................... 143
9.1.4 Schedule Mode .............................................................................................. 144
9.2 Bandwidth Control .................................................................................................... 145
9.2.1 Rate Limit ....................................................................................................... 145
9.2.2 Storm Control ................................................................................................. 146
9.3 Voice VLAN .............................................................................................................. 148
9.3.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 150
9.3.2 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 150
9.3.3 OUI Config ..................................................................................................... 152
Chapter 10 PoE .......................................................................................................................... 154
10.1 PoE Config ............................................................................................................... 154
10.1.1 PoE Config ..................................................................................................... 155
10.1.2 PoE Profile ..................................................................................................... 156
10.2 PoE Time-Range ...................................................................................................... 157
10.2.1 Time-Range Summary ................................................................................... 157
10.2.2 PoE Time-Range Create ................................................................................ 158
10.2.3 PoE Holiday Config ........................................................................................ 159
Chapter 11 ACL .......................................................................................................................... 161
11.1 Time-Range .............................................................................................................. 161
11.1.1 Time-Range Summary ................................................................................... 161
11.1.2 Time-Range Create ........................................................................................ 162
11.1.3 Holiday Config ................................................................................................ 163
11.2 ACL Config ............................................................................................................... 163
11.2.1 ACL Summary ................................................................................................ 164
11.2.2 ACL Create .................................................................................................... 164
11.2.3 MAC ACL ....................................................................................................... 165
11.2.4 Standard-IP ACL ............................................................................................ 166
11.2.5 Extend-IP ACL ............................................................................................... 166
11.3 Policy Config ............................................................................................................. 168
11.3.1 Policy Summary ............................................................................................. 168
11.3.2 Policy Create .................................................................................................. 168
VI
11.3.3 Action Create ................................................................................................. 169
11.4 Policy Binding ........................................................................................................... 170
11.4.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................. 170
11.4.2 Port Binding ................................................................................................... 171
11.4.3 VLAN Binding ................................................................................................. 171
11.5 Application Example for ACL .................................................................................... 172
Chapter 12 Network Security ...................................................................................................... 175
12.1 IP-MAC Binding ........................................................................................................ 175
12.1.1 Binding Table ................................................................................................. 175
12.1.2 Manual Binding .............................................................................................. 177
12.1.3 ARP Scanning ................................................................................................ 178
12.1.4 DHCP Snooping ............................................................................................. 179
12.2 ARP Inspection ......................................................................................................... 185
12.2.1 ARP Detect .................................................................................................... 189
12.2.2 ARP Defend ................................................................................................... 190
12.2.3 ARP Statistics ................................................................................................ 191
12.3 DoS Defend .............................................................................................................. 192
12.4 802.1X ...................................................................................................................... 194
12.4.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 198
12.4.2 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 200
12.4.3 Radius Server ................................................................................................ 201
Chapter 13 SNMP ....................................................................................................................... 204
13.1 SNMP Config ............................................................................................................ 206
13.1.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 206
13.1.2 SNMP View .................................................................................................... 207
13.1.3 SNMP Group .................................................................................................. 208
13.1.4 SNMP User .................................................................................................... 209
13.1.5 SNMP Community.......................................................................................... 211
13.2 Notification ................................................................................................................ 213
13.3 RMON ....................................................................................................................... 215
13.3.1 History Control ............................................................................................... 216
13.3.2 Event Config .................................................................................................. 216
13.3.3 Alarm Config .................................................................................................. 217
Chapter 14 Cluster ...................................................................................................................... 220
14.1 NDP .......................................................................................................................... 221
VII
14.1.1 Neighbor Info ................................................................................................. 221
14.1.2 NDP Summary ............................................................................................... 222
14.1.3 NDP Config .................................................................................................... 224
14.2 NTDP ........................................................................................................................ 225
14.2.1 Device Table .................................................................................................. 225
14.2.2 NTDP Summary ............................................................................................. 226
14.2.3 NTDP Config .................................................................................................. 228
14.3 Cluster ...................................................................................................................... 229
14.3.1 Cluster Summary ........................................................................................... 229
14.3.2 Cluster Config ................................................................................................ 230
14.4 Application Example for Cluster Function ................................................................. 232
Chapter 15 LLDP ........................................................................................................................ 235
15.1 Basic Config ............................................................................................................. 239
15.1.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 239
15.1.2 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 240
15.2 Device Info ................................................................................................................ 241
15.2.1 Local Info ....................................................................................................... 241
15.2.2 Neighbor Info ................................................................................................. 242
15.3 Device Statistics ........................................................................................................ 242
15.4 LLDP-MED ............................................................................................................... 244
15.4.1 Global Config ................................................................................................. 245
15.4.2 Port Config ..................................................................................................... 246
15.4.3 Local Info ....................................................................................................... 247
15.4.4 Neighbor Info ................................................................................................. 248
Chapter 16 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 250
16.1 System Monitor ......................................................................................................... 250
16.1.1 CPU Monitor .................................................................................................. 250
16.1.2 Memory Monitor ............................................................................................. 251
16.2 Log ............................................................................................................................ 251
16.2.1 Log Table ....................................................................................................... 252
16.2.2 Local Log ....................................................................................................... 253
16.2.3 Remote Log ................................................................................................... 253
16.2.4 Backup Log .................................................................................................... 254
16.3 Device Diagnostics ................................................................................................... 255
16.3.1 Cable Test ...................................................................................................... 255
VIII
16.4 Network Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 256
16.4.1 Ping ................................................................................................................ 256
16.4.2 Tracert ............................................................................................................ 257
Appendix A: Specifications ......................................................................................................... 258
Appendix B: Load Software Using FTP ...................................................................................... 260
Appendix C: Glossary ................................................................................................................. 263
IX
Package Contents
The following items should be found in your box:
One JetStream L2 Managed Switch
One power cord
One console cable
Two mounting brackets and other fittings
Installation Guide
Resource CD for TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch, including:
• This User Guide
• The CLI Reference Guide
• SNMP Mibs
• 802.1X Client Software and its User Guide
• Other Helpful Information
Note:
Make sure that the package contains the above items. If any of the listed items are damaged or
missing, please contact your distributor.
1
Chapter 1 About This Guide
This User Guide contains information for setup and management of TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/
TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed Switch. Please read this guide carefully before
operation.
1.1 Intended Readers
This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies.
1.2 Conventions
In this Guide the following conventions are used:
The switch or device mentioned in this Guide stands for TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/
TL-SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed Switch without any explanation.
Tips:
The TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switchs are sharing this User Guide. They
just differ in the number of LED indicators and ports. For simplicity, we will take TL-SG3424 for
example throughout this Guide. However, differences with significance will be presented with
figures or notes as to attract your attention.
Menu Name→Submenu Name→Tab page indicates the menu structure. System→System
Info→System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu
option that is located under the System menu.
Bold font indicates a button, a toolbar icon, menu or menu item.
Symbols in this Guide：
Symbol Description
Note:
Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the
device.
Tips:
This format indicates important information that helps you
make better use
of your device.
1.3 Overview of This Guide
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 1 About This Guide Introduces the guide structure and conventions.
Chapter 2 Introduction Introduces the features, application and appearance of the switch.
2
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch Introduces how to log on to the Web management page.
Chapter 4 System This module is used to configure system properties of the switch.
Here mainly introduces:
System Info: Configure the description, system time and network
parameters of the switch.
User Management: Configure the user name and password for
users to log on to the Web management page with a certain
access level.
System Tools: Manage the configuration file of the switch.
Access Security:
Provide different security measures for the
login to enhance the configuration management security.
Chapter 5 Switching This module is used to configure basic functions of the switch. Here
mainly introduces:
Port: Configure the basic features for the port.
LAG: Configure Link Aggregation Group. LAG is to combine a
number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data
path.
Traffic Monitor: Monitor the traffic of each port
MAC Address: Configure the address table of the switch.
Chapter 6 VLAN This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in
LANs. Here mainly introduces:
802.1Q VLAN: Configure port-based VLAN.
MAC VLAN: Configure MAC-based VLAN without changing the
802.1Q VLAN configuration.
Protocol VLAN: Create VLANs in application layer to make some
special data transmitted in the specified VLAN.
GVRP: GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove
the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and
propagate the local VLAN registration information to other
switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree This module is used to configure spanning tree function o
f the
switch. Here mainly introduces:
STP Config: Configure and view the global settings of spanning
tree function.
Port Config: Configure CIST parameters of ports.
MSTP Instance: Configure MSTP instances.
STP Security: Configure protection function to prevent devices
from any malicious attack against STP features.
Chapter 8 Multicast This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch.
Here mainly introduces:
IGMP Snooping: Configure global parameters of IGMP Snooping
function, port properties, VLAN and multicast VLAN.
MLD Snooping: Configure global parameters of MLD Snooping
function, port properties, VLAN and multicast VLAN.
Multicast Table: View the information of IPv4 and IPv6 multicast
groups already on the switch.
3
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 9 QoS This module is used to configure QoS function to provide different
quality of service for various network applications and
requirements. Here mainly introduces:
DiffServ: Configure priorities, port priori
ty, 802.1P priority and
DSCP priority.
Bandwidth Control: Configure rate limit feature to control the
traffic rate on each port; configure storm control feature to filter
broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.
Voice VLAN: Configure voice VLAN to
transmit voice data
stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the
transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality.
Chapter 10 PoE This module is used to configure the PoE function for the switch to
supply power for PD devices. Here mainly introduces:
PoE Config: Configure PoE function globally.
PoE Time-Range: Configure the effective time for PoE port to
supply power.
Chapter 11 ACL This module is used to configure match rules and process policies
of packets to filter packets in order to control the access of the
illegal users to the network. Here mainly introduces:
Time-Range: Configure the effective time for ACL rules.
ACL Config: ACL rules.
Policy Config: Configure operation policies.
Policy Binding: Bind the policy to a port/VLAN to take its effect on
a specific port/VLAN.
Chapter 12 Network Security This module is used to configure the multiple protection measures
for the network security. Here mainly introduces:
IP-MAC Binding: Bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID
and the connected Port number of the Host together.
ARP Inspection: Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent the
network from ARP attacks.
DoS Defend: Configure DoS defend feat
ure to prevent DoS
attack.
802.1X: Configure common access control mechanism for LAN
ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems.
Chapter 13 SNMP
This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a
management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices.
Here mainly introduces:
SNMP Config: Configure global settings of SNMP function.
Notification: Configure notification function for the management
station to monitor and process the events.
RMON: Configur
e RMON function to monitor network more
efficiently.
4
Chapter Introduction
Chapter 14 Cluster This module is used to configure cluster function to central manage
the scattered devices in the network. Here mainly introduces:
NDP: Configure NDP function to get the information of the directly
connected neighbor devices.
NTDP: Configure NTDP function for the commander switch to
collect NDP information.
Cluster: Configure cluster function to establish and maintain
cluster.
Chapter 15 LLDP
This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide
information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting. Here
mainly introduces:
Basic Config: Configure the LLDP parameters of the device.
Device Info: View the LLDP information of the local device and its
neighbors.
Device Statistics: View the LLDP statistics of the local device.
LLDP-MED: Configure LLDP-MED parameters of the device.
Chapter 16 Maintenance This module is used to assemble the commonly used system tools
to manage the switch. Here mainly introduces:
System Monitor: Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch.
Log: View configuration parameters on the switch.
Device Diagnostics:
Test the connection status of the cable
connected to the switch, test if the port of the switch and the
connected device are available.
Network Diagnostics: Test if the destination is reachable and the
account of router hops from the switch to the destination.
Appendix A Specifications Lists the hardware specifications of the switch.
Appendix B Configure the PCs Introduces how to configure the PCs.
Appendix C Load Software
Using FTP
Introduces how to load firmware of the switch via FTP function.
Appendix D 802.1X Client
Software
Introduces how to use 802.1X Client Software provided for
authentication.
Appendix E Glossary Lists the glossary used in this manual.
Return to CONTENTS
5
Chapter 2 Introduction
Thanks for choosing the TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P JetStream L2
Managed Switch!
2.1 Overview of the Switch
Designed for workgroups and departments, TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P
from TP-LINK provides wire-speed performance and full set of layer 2 management features. It
provides a variety of service features and multiple powerful functions with high security.
The EIA-standardized framework and smart configuration capacity can provide flexible solutions
for a variable scale of networks. ACL, 802.1x and Dynamic ARP Inspection provide robust security
strategy. QoS and IGMP/MLD snooping optimize voice and video application. Link aggregation
(LACP) increases aggregated bandwidth, optimizing the transport of business critical data.
SNMP/SNMPv6, RMON, WEB/CLI/Telnet Log-in bring abundant management policies.
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch integrates multiple functions with
excellent performance, and is friendly to manage, which can fully meet the need of the users
demanding higher networking performance.
2.2 Appearance Description
2.2.1 Front Panel
The front panel of TL-SG3210 is shown as the following figure.
Figure 2-1 Front Panel of TL-SG3210
The front panel of TL-SG3216 is shown as the following figure.
Figure 2-2 Front Panel of TL-SG3216
The front panel of TL-SG3424 is shown as the following figure.
Figure 2-3 Front Panel of TL-SG3424
The front panel of TL-SG3424P is shown as the following figure.
Figure 2-4 Front Panel of TL-SG3424P
6
The following parts are located on the front panel of the switches:
10/100/1000Mbps Ports: Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps,
100Mbps or 1000Mbps. Each has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED. Each port of
TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424 also features a Link/Act LED.
SFP Ports: Designed to install the SFP module. TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch
features some SFP transceiver slots that are shared with the associated RJ45 ports. The
associated two ports are referred to as “Combo” ports, which means they cannot be used
simultaneously, otherwise only SFP ports work. TL-SG3210 features two individual SFP ports.
Note:
For TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch, when using the SFP port with a 100M module or
a gigabit module, you need to configure its corresponding Speed and Duplex mode on
Switching→Port→Port Config page. For 100M module, please select 100MFD while select
1000MFD for gigabit module. By default, the Speed and Duplex mode of SFP port is 1000MFD.
For TL-SG3210’s SFP port, it only supports 1000MFD mode.
Console Port: Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring
and configuring the switch.
LEDs
For TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424:
Name Status Indication
Power
(PWR)
On Power is on.
Flashing Power supply is abnormal.
Off Power is off or power supply is abnormal.
System
(SYS)
On The switch is working abnormally.
Flashing The switch is working normally.
Off The switch is working abnormally.
1000Mbps
On
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port.
Off
A 10/100Mbps device or no device is connected to the
corresponding port.
Link/Act
On
A device is connected to the corresponding port, but not
activity.
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.
Off No device is connected to the corresponding port.
Note:
There is no Link/Act LED on TL-SG3210.
7
For TL-SG3424P:
TL-SG3424P has a LED mode switch button which is for switching the LED status indication.
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate. When the PoE
LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status. By default the Speed LED is on.
Pressing the mode switch button, the Speed LED will turn off and the PoE LED will light up. Then
the PoE LED will turn off after being on for 60 seconds and the Speed LED will light up again.
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate.
Name Status Indication
Power
On The switch is powered on.
Off The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing Power supply is abnormal.
System Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
10/100/1000Mbps
Green On A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding
port, but no activity.
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.
Yellow On
A 10/100Mbps device is connected to the
corresponding port, but no activity.
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.
Off No device is connected to the corresponding port.
When the PoE LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status.
Name Status Indication
Power
On The switch is powered on.
Off The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.
Flashing Power supply is abnormal.
System Flashing The switch works properly.
On/Off The switch works improperly.
PoE Max
On The remaining PoE power≤7W.
Flashing The remaining PoE power keeps ≤7W after this LED is
on for 2 minutes.
Off The remaining PoE power>7W.
10/100/1000Mbps
Green
On The port is supplying power normally.
Flashing The supply power exceeds the corresponding port’s
maximum power.
Yellow On Overload or short circuit is detected.
Off No PoE power supply is provided on the port.
8
2.2.2 Rear Panel
The rear panel of the switch features a power socket and a Grounding Terminal (marked with ).
Figure 2-5 Rear Panel
Grounding Terminal: The switch already comes with Lightning Protection Mechanism. You
can also ground the switch through the PE (Protecting Earth) cable of AC cord or with Ground
Cable.
AC Power Socket: Connect the female connector of the power cord here, and the male
connector to the AC power outlet. Make sure the voltage of the power supply meets the
requirement of the input voltage (100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.6A for TL-SG3210, 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.4A
TL-SG3216, 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.5A TL-SG3424 and 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 5A for TL-SG3424P).
Return to CONTENTS
9
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch
3.1 Login
1) To access the configuration utility, open a web-browser and type in the default address
http://192.168.0.1 in the address field of the browser, then press the Enter key.
Figure 3-1 Web-browser
Tips:
To log in to the switch, the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of
the switch. The IP address is 192.168.0.x ("x" is any number from 2 to 254), Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0. For the detailed instructions as to how to do this, please refer to Appendix B.
2) After a moment, a login window will appear, as shown in Figure 3-2. Enter admin for the User
Name and Password, both in lower case letters. Then click the Login button or press the
Enter key.
Figure 3-2 Login
10
3.2 Configuration
After a successful login, the main page will appear as Figure 3-3, and you can configure the
function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen.
Figure 3-3 Main Setup-Menu
Note:
Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted. If
you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted, please click Save
Config. You are suggested to click Save Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the
switch to avoid losing the new configurations.
Return to CONTENTS
11
Chapter 4 System
The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch, including four submenus:
System Info, User Management, System Tools and Access Security.
4.1 System Info
The System Info, mainly for basic properties configuration, can be implemented on System
Summary, Device Description, System Time, Daylight Saving Time, System IP and System
IPv6 pages.
4.1.1 System Summary
On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information.
The port status diagram shows the working status of 24 10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 ports and 4 SFP
ports of the switch. Ports 1-20 and ports 21T-24T are 10/100/1000Mbps ports and ports 21T-24T
are Combo ports with SFP ports labeled as 21F-24F.
Choose the menu System →System Info →System Summary to load the following page.
Figure 4-1 System Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Status
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device.
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps.
12
Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device.
Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.
Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 100Mbps.
When the cursor moves on the port, the detailed information of the port will be displayed.
Figure 4-2 Port Information
Port Info
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Type: Displays the type of the port.
Speed: Displays the maximum transmission rate of the port.
Status: Displays the connection status of the port.
Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port. The actual rate divided by theoretical
maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization. The following figure displays the bandwidth utilization
monitored every four seconds. Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to
monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities.
Figure 4-3 Bandwidth Utilization
Bandwidth Utilization
Rx:
Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets
on this port.
13
Tx:
Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets
on this port.
4.1.2 Device Description
On this page you can configure the description of the switch, including device name, device location
and system contact.
Choose the menu System →System Info →Device Description to load the following page.
Figure 4-4 Device Description
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Device Description
Device Name: Enter the name of the switch.
Device Location: Enter the location of the switch.
System Contact: Enter your contact information.
4.1.3 System Time
System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running. On this page you can configure the
system time and the settings here will be used for other time-based functions like ACL.
You can manually set the system time, get time from NTP server automatically if it has connected to
an NTP server or synchronize with PC’s clock as the system time.
Choose the menu System →System Info →System Time to load the following page.
Figure 4-5 System Time
14
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Time Info
Current System
Date:
Displays the current date and time of the switch.
Current Time
Source:
Displays the current time Source of the switch.
Time Config
Manual: When this option is selected, you can set the
date and time
manually.
Get time from NT
P
Server:
When this option is selected, you can configure the time zone
and
the IP Address for the NTP server. The switch will get time
from
NTP server automatically if it has connected to an NTP server.
Time Zone: Select your local time.
Primary/Secondary NTP Server: En
ter the IP Address for the
NTP server.
Update Rate: Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.
Synchronize with
PC’S Clock:
When this option is selected, the administrator PC’s
clock is
utilized.
Note:
1. The system time will be restored to the default when the switch is restarted and you need to
reconfigure the system time of the switch.
2. When Get time from NTP Server is selected and no time server is configured, the switch will
get time from the time server of the Internet if it has connected to the Internet.
4.1.4 Daylight Saving Time
Here you can configure the Daylight Saving Time of the switch.
15
Choose the menu System →System Info →Daylight Saving Time to load the following page.
Figure 4-6 Daylight Saving Time
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DST Config
DST Status: Enable or disable the DST.
Predefined Mode: Select a predefined DST configuration:
USA: Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First
Sunday in
November, 02:00.
Australia: First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in
April, 03:00.
Europe
: Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in
October, 01:00.
New Zealand: Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ Fir
st
Sunday in April, 03:00.
Recurring Mode:
Specify the DST configuration in recurring mode. This
configuration is recurring in use.
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight
Saving Time comes.
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of
Daylight Saving Time.
Date Mode:
Specify the DST configuration in Date mode. This configuration is
one-off in use.
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight
Saving Time comes.
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of
Daylight Saving Time.
16
Note:
1. When the DST is disabled, the predefined mode, recurring mode and date mode cannot be
configured.
2. When the DST is enabled, the default daylight saving time is of Europe in predefined mode.
4.1.5 System IP
Each device in the network possesses a unique IP Address. You can log on to the Web
management page to operate the switch using this IP Address. The switch supports three modes
to obtain an IP address: Static IP, DHCP and BOOTP. The IP address obtained using a new mode
will replace the original IP address. On this page you can configure the system IP of the switch.
Choose the menu System →System Info →System IP to load the following page.
Figure 4-7 System IP
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
IP Config
MAC Address: Displays MAC Address of the switch.
IP Address Mode: Select the mode to obtain IP Address for the switch.
Static IP: When this option is selected, you should enter IP
Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway manually.
DHCP: When this option is selected, the switch will obtain
network parameters from the DHCP Server.
BOOTP: When this option is selected, the switch will obtain
network parameters from the BOOTP Server.
IP Address:
Enter the system IP of the switch. The default system IP is
192.168.0.1 and you can change it appropriate to your needs.
Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask of the switch.
Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway of the switch.
Note:
1. Changing the IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication,
so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network.
2. The switch only possesses an IP address. The IP address configured will replace the original
IP address.
17
3. If the switch gets the IP address from DHCP server, you can see the configuration of the
switch in the DHCP server; if DHCP option is selected but no DHCP server exists in the
network, a few minutes later, the switch will restore the setting to the default.
4. If DHCP or BOOTP option is selected, the switch will get network parameters dynamically
from the Internet, which means that its IP address, subnet mask and default gateway cannot
be configured.
5. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1.
4.1.6 System IPv6
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), also called IPng (IP next generation), was developed by the
IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) as the successor to IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4).
Compared with IPv4, IPv6 increases the IP address size from 32 bits to 128 bits; this solves the
IPv4 address exhaustion problem.
IPv6 features
IPv6 has the following features:
1. Adequate address space: The source and destination IPv6 addresses are both 128 bits (16
bytes) long. IPv6 can provide 3.4 x 1038 addresses to completely meet the requirements of
hierarchical address division as well as allocation of public and private addresses.
2. Header format simplification: IPv6 cuts down some IPv4 header fields or move them to IPv6
extension headers to reduce the load of basic IPv6 headers, thus making IPv6 packet handling
simple and improving the forwarding efficiency. Although the IPv6 address size is four times
that of IPv4 addresses, the size of basic IPv6 headers is 40 bytes and is only twice that of IPv4
headers (excluding the Options field).
3. Flexible extension headers: IPv6 cancels the Options field in IPv4 packets but introduces
multiple extension headers. In this way, IPv6 enhances the flexibility greatly to provide
scalability for IP while improving the handling efficiency. The Options field in IPv4 packets
contains 40 bytes at most, while the size of IPv6 extension headers is restricted by that of IPv6
packets.
4. Built-in security: IPv6 uses IPSec as its standard extension header to provide end-to-end
security. This feature provides a standard for network security solutions and improves the
interoperability between different IPv6 applications.
5. Automatic address configuration: To simplify the host configuration, IPv6 supports stateful
and stateless address configuration.
Stateful address configuration means that a host acquires an IPv6 address and related
information from a server (for example, DHCP server).
Stateless address configuration means that a host automatically configures an IPv6
address and related information on basis of its own link-layer address and the prefix
information advertised by a router.
In addition, a host can generate a link-local address on basis of its own link-layer address and
the default prefix (FE80::/64) to communicate with other hosts on the link.
18
6. Enhanced neighbor discovery mechanism: The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol is a
group of Internet control message protocol version 6 (ICMPv6) messages that manages the
information exchange between neighbor nodes on the same link. The group of ICMPv6
messages takes the place of Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) message, Internet Control
Message Protocol version 4 (ICMPv4) router discovery message, and ICMPv4 redirection
message to provide a series of other functions.
Introduction to IPv6 address
1. IPv6 address format
An IPv6 address is represented as a series of 16-bit hexadecimals, separated by colons (:).
An IPv6 address is divided into eight groups, and the 16 bits of each group are represented by
four hexadecimal numbers which are separated by colons, for example,
2001:0d02:0000:0000:0014: 0000:0000:0095. The hexadecimal letters in IPv6 addresses are
not case-sensitive.
To simplify the representation of IPv6 addresses, zeros in IPv6 addresses can be handled as
follows:
Leading zeros in each group can be removed. For example, the above-mentioned address
can be represented in shorter format as 2001:d02:0:0:14:0:0:95.
Two colons (::) may be used to compress successive hexadecimal fields of zeros at the
beginning, middle, or end of an IPv6 address. For example, the above-mentioned address
can be represented in the shortest format as 2001:d02::14:0:0:95.
Note:
Two colons (::) can be used only once in an IPv6 address, usually to represent the longest
successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. If two colons are used more than once, the device is
unable to determine how many zeros double-colons represent when converting them to zeros to
restore a 128-bit IPv6 address.
An IPv6 address consists of two parts: address prefix and interface ID. The address prefix and
the interface ID are respectively equivalent to the network ID and the host ID in an IPv4
address.
An IPv6 address prefix is represented in "IPv6 address/prefix length" format, where "IPv6
address" is an IPv6 address in any of the above-mentioned formats and "prefix length" is a
decimal number indicating how many leftmost bits from the preceding IPv6 address are used
as the address prefix.
2. IPv6 address classification
IPv6 addresses fall into three types: unicast address, multicast address, and anycast address.
Unicast address: An identifier for a single interface, on a single node. A packet that is sent
to a unicast address is delivered to the interface identified by that address.
19
Multicast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes),
similar to an IPv4 multicast address. A packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all
interfaces identified by that address. There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6. Their
function is superseded by multicast addresses.
Anycast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes).
A packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of the interfaces identified by that
address (the nearest one, according to the routing protocols’ measure of distance).
The type of an IPv6 address is designated by the first several bits called format prefix. The
following table lists the mappings between address types and format prefixes.
Type Format Prefix (binary) IPv6 Prefix ID
Unicast
address
Unassigned address 00…0 (128 bits) ::/128
Loopback address 00…1 (128 bits) ::1/128
Link-local address 1111111010 FE80::/10
Site-local address 1111111011 FEC0::/10
Global unicast address
(currently assigned) 001 2xxx::/4 or 3xxx::/4
Reserved type
(to be assigned in future) Other formats
Multicast address 11111111 FF00::/8
Anycast address
Anycast addresses are taken from unicast
address spac
e and are not syntactically
distinguishable from unicast addresses.
Table 4-1 Mappings between address types and format prefixes
3. IPv6 Unicast Address：
IPv6 unicast address is an identifier for a single interface. It consists of a subnet prefix and an
interface ID.
Subnet Prefix: This section is allocated by the IANA (The Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority), the ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the organizations.
Interface ID: An interface ID is used to identify interfaces on a link. The interface ID must be
unique to the link.
There are several ways to form interface IDs. The IPv6 addresses with format prefixes 001
through 111, except for multicast addresses (1111 1111), are all required to have 64-bit
interface IDs in EUI-64 format.
20
For all IEEE 802 interface types (for example, Ethernet and FDDI interfaces), Interface IDs in
the modified EUI-64 format are constructed in the following way:
The first three octets (24 bits) are taken from the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) of the
48-bit link-layer address (the MAC address) of the interface, the fourth and fifth octets (16 bits)
are a fixed hexadecimal value of FFFE, and the last three octets (24 bits) are taken from the
last three octets of the MAC address. The construction of the interface ID is completed by
setting the universal/local (U/L) bit--the seventh bit of the first octet--to a value of 0 or 1. A
value of 0 indicates a locally administered identifier; a value of 1 indicates a globally unique
IPv6 interface identifier.
Tak e MAC address 0012:0B0A:2D51 as an example. Insert FFFE to the middle of the address
to get 0012:0BFF:FE0A:2D51. Then set the U/L bit to 1 to obtain an interface ID in EUI-64
format as 0212:0BFF:FE0A:2D51.
IPv6 unicast address can be classified into several types, as shown in Table 4-1. The two
most common types are introduced below:
Global unicast address
A Global unicast address is an IPv6 unicast address that is globally unique and is routable on
the global Internet.
Global unicast addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface
ID. The IPv6 global unicast address starts with binary value 001 (2000::/3). The global routing
prefix is a value assigned to a site (a cluster of subnets/links) by IANA. The subnet ID is an
identifier of a subnet within the site.
The figure below shows the structure of a global unicast address.
Figure 4-8 Global Unicast Address Format
Link-local address
A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically configured on any
interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 (1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the
modified EUI-64 format. Link-local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol and
the stateless autoconfiguration process. Nodes on a local link can use link-local addresses to
communicate. The figure below shows the structure of a link-local address.
21
Figure 4-9 Link-local Address Format
IPv6 devices must not forward packets that have link-local source or destination addresses to
other links.
Note:
You can configure multiple IPv6 addresses per interface, but only one link-local address.
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited-node multicast
addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network (local link),
verify the reachability of a neighbor, and track neighboring devices.
1. IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation Message and Neighbor Advertisement Message
A value of 135 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header identifies a neighbor solicitation
(NS) message. Neighbor solicitation messages are sent on the local link when a node wants
to determine the link-layer address of another node on the same local link.
After receiving the neighbor solicitation message, the destination node replies by sending a
neighbor advertisement (NA) message, which has a value of 136 in the Type field of the ICMP
packet header, on the local link. After the source node receives the neighbor advertisement,
the source node and destination node can communicate.
Neighbor advertisement messages are also sent when there is a change in the link-layer
address of a node on a local link.
Address Resolution
The address resolution procedure is as follows:
Node A multicasts an NS message. The source address of the NS message is the IPv6
address of an interface of node A and the destination address is the solicited-node multicast
address of node B. The NS message contains the link-layer address of node A.
After receiving the NS message, node B judges whether the destination address of the
packet corresponds to the solicited-node multicast address. If yes, node B can learn the
link-layer address of node A, and unicasts an NA message containing its link-layer address.
Node A acquires the link-layer address of node B from the NA message.
22
Neighbor Reachability Detection
After node A acquires the link-layer address of its neighbor node B, node A can verify whether
node B is reachable according to NS and NA messages.
Node A sends an NS message whose destination address is the IPv6 address of node B.
If node A receives an NA message from node B, node A considers that node B is reachable.
Otherwise, node B is unreachable.
Duplicate Address Detection
Neighbor solicitation messages are used in the stateless autoconfiguration process to verify
the uniqueness of unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to an interface.
After node A acquires an IPv6 address, it will perform duplicate address detection (DAD) to
determine whether the address is being used by other nodes (similar to the gratuitous ARP
function of IPv4). DAD is accomplished through NS and NA messages. The DAD procedure is
as follows:
Node A sends an NS message whose source address is the unassigned address :: and
destination address is the corresponding solicited-node multicast address of the IPv6
address to be detected. The NS message contains the IPv6 address.
If node B uses this IPv6 address, node B returns an NA message. The NA message
contains the IPv6 address of node B.
Node A learns that the IPv6 address is being used by node B after receiving the NA
message from node B. Otherwise, node B is not using the IPv6 address and node A can
use it.
2. IPv6 Router Advertisement Message
Router advertisement (RA) messages, which have a value of 134 in the Type field of the ICMP
packet header, are periodically sent out each configured interface of an IPv6 router.
RA messages typically include the following information:
One or more onlink IPv6 prefixes that nodes on the local link can use to automatically
configure their IPv6 addresses.
Lifetime information for each prefix included in the advertisement.
Sets of flags that indicate the type of autoconfiguration (stateless or stateful) that can be
completed.
Default router information (whether the device sending the advertisement should be used
as a default router and, if so, the amount of time, in seconds, the device should be used as
a default router).
Additional information for hosts, such as the hop limit and maximum transmission unit (MTU)
a host should use in packets that it originates.
23
RAs are also sent in response to device solicitation messages. Device solicitation messages,
which have a value of 133 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header, are sent by hosts at
system startup or anytime needed so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without
needing to wait for the next scheduled RA message.
Hosts discover and select default devices by listening to Router Advertisements (RAs).
Stateless address autoconfiguration means that the node automatically configures an IPv6
address and other information for its interface according to the address prefix and other
configuration parameters in the received RA messages.
3. IPv6 Neighbor Redirect Message
A value of 137 in the type field of the ICMP packet header identifies an IPv6 neighbor redirect
message. Devices send neighbor redirect messages to inform hosts of better first-hop nodes
on the path to a destination.
A device will send an IPv6 ICMP redirect message when the following conditions are satisfied:
The receiving interface is the forwarding interface.
The selected route itself is not created or modified by an IPv6 ICMP redirect message.
The selected route is not the default route.
The forwarded IPv6 packet does not contain any routing header.
24
You can configure the system’s administrative IPv6 address on this page.
Choose the menu System →System Info →System IPv6 to load the following page.
Figure 4-10 System IPv6
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
IPv6: Enable/Disable IPv6 function globally on the switch.
Link-local Address Config
Config Mode: Select the link-local address configuration mode.
Manual:
When this option is selected, you should assign a
link-local address manually.
Auto: When this option is selected,
the switch will generate a
link-local address automatically.
Link-local Address: Enter a link-local address.
25
Status: Displays the status of the link-local address.
Normal: Indicates that the link-local address is normal.
Try: Indicates that the link-
local address may be newly
configured.
Repeat: Indicates that the link-loca
l address is duplicate. It is
illegal to access the switch using the IPv6 address(including
link-local and global address).
Global Address Autoconfig via RA Message
Enable global
address auto
configuration via RA
message:
When this option is enabled, the
switch automatically configures a
global address and other information according to the address
prefix and other configuration parameters from the received
RA(Router Advertisement) message.
Global Address Autoconfig via DHCPv6 Server
Enable Global
Address Autoconfig
via DHCPv6 Server:
When this option is enabled,
the system will try to obtain the
global address from the DHCPv6 Server.
Add a global address manually
Address Format:
You can select the global address format according to your
requirements.
EUI-64:
Indicates that you only need to specify an address
prefix, and then the system will create a global address
automatically.
Not EUI-64:
Indicates that you have to specify an intact global
address.
Global Address: When selecting the mode of EUI-64, pl
ease input the address
prefix here, otherwise, please input an intact IPv6 address here.
Global address Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding
global address.
Global Address: Modify the global address.
Prefix Length: Modify the prefix length of the global address.
Type: Displays the configuration mode of the global address.
Manual:
Indicates that the corresponding address is
configured manually.
Auto:
Indicates that the corresponding address is created
automatically
using the RA message or obtained from the
DHCPv6 Server.
Preferred
Lifetime/Valid
Lifetime:
Displays the preferred time and valid time of the global address.
26
Status: Displays the status of the global address.
Normal: Indicates that the global address is normal.
Try:
Indicates that the global address may be newly
configured.
Repeat:
Indicates that the corresponding address is duplicate.
It is illegal to access the switch using this address.
Tips:
After adding a global IPv6 address to your switch manually here, you can configure your PC’s
global IPv6 address in the same subnet with the switch and login to the switch via its global IPv6
address.
4.2 User Management
User Management functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the
Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from
being randomly changed.
The User Management function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages.
4.2.1 User Table
On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch.
Choose the menu System →User Management →User Table to load the following page.
Figure 4-11 User Table
4.2.2 User Config
On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management
page. The switch provides two access levels: Guest and Admin. The guest only can view the
settings without the right to configure the switch; the admin can configure all the functions of the
switch. The Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin’s login
without any explanation.
27
Choose the menu System →User Management →User Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-12 User Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
User Info
User Name: Create a name for users’ login.
Access Level: Select the access level to login.
Admin: Admin can edit, modify and view all the settings of
different functions.
Guest: Guest only can view the settings without the right to edit
and modify.
Password: Type a password for users’ login.
Confirm Password: Retype the password.
User Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user
information. It is multi-optional The current user information cannot
be deleted.
User ID, Name,
Access Level:
Displays the current user ID, user name, access level
and user
status.
Operation: Click the Edit
button of the desired entry, and you can edit the
corresponding user information. After modifying the settings,
please click the Modify
button to make the modification effective.
Access level and user status of
the current user information
cannot be modified.
28
4.3 System Tools
The System Tools function, allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch, can be
implemented on Config Restore, Config Backup, Firmware Upgrade, System Reboot and
System Reset pages.
4.3.1 Config Restore
On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous
configuration.
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Config Restore to load the following page.
Figure 4-13 Config Restore
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Config Restore
Restore Config: Click the Restore Config
button to restore the backup
configuration file. It will take effect after the switch automatically
reboots.
Note:
1. It will take a few minutes to restore the configuration. Please wait without any operation.
2. To avoid any damage, please do not power down the switch while it’s being restored.
3. After being restored, the current settings of the switch will be lost. Wrong uploaded
configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged.
4.3.2 Config Backup
On this page you can download the current configuration and save it as a file to your computer for
your future configuration restore.
29
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Config Backup to load the following page.
Figure 4-14 Config Backup
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Config Backup
Backup Config: Click the Backup Config
button to save the current configuration
as a file to
your computer. You are suggested to take this measure
before upgrading.
Note:
It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration. Please wait without any operation.
4.3.3 Firmware Upgrade
The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page. To upgrade the system is to
get more functions and better performance. Go to http:// www.tp-link.com to download the updated
firmware.
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Firmware Upgrade to load the following page.
Figure 4-15 Firmware Upgrade
Note:
1. Do not interrupt the upgrade.
2. Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade.
3. To avoid damage, please do not turn off the device while upgrading.
4. After upgrading, the device will reboot automatically.
5. You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading.
30
4.3.4 System Reboot
On this page you can reboot the switch and return to the login page. Please save the current
configuration before rebooting to avoid losing the configuration unsaved
Choose the menu System →System Tools →System Reboot to load the following page.
Figure 4-16 System Reboot
Note:
To avoid damage, please do not turn off the device while rebooting.
4.3.5 System Reset
On this page you can reset the switch to the default. All the settings will be cleared after the switch
is reset.
Choose the menu System →System Tools →System Reset to load the following page.
Figure 4-17 System Reset
Note:
After the system is reset, the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared.
4.4 Access Security
Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the
configuration management security. It can be implemented on Access Control, HTTP Config,
HTTPS Config, SSH Config and Telnet Config pages.
4.4.1 Access Control
On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the
configuration management security. The definitions of Admin and Guest refer to 4.2 User
Management.
31
Choose the menu System →Access Security →Access Control to load the following page.
Figure 4-18 Access Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Access Control Config
Control Mode:
Select the control mode for users to log on to the Web
management page.
IP-based: Select this option to limit the IP-
range of the users for
login.
MAC-based: Select this option to limit the MAC Address of t
he
users for login.
Port-based: Select this option to limit the ports for login.
Access Interface: Select the interface for access control to apply.
IP Address & Mask These fields is available to configure only when IP-based mode is
selected. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are
allowed for login.
MAC Address: The field is available to configure only when MAC-based mode is
selected. Only the user with this MAC Address you set here are
allowed for login.
Port: The field is available to configure only when Port-based mode is
selected. Only the users connecting to the ports selected are
allowed to manage the switch.
4.4.2 HTTP Config
With the help of HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol), you can manage the switch through a
standard browser. The standards development of HTTP was coordinated by the Internet
Engineering Task Force and the World Wide Web Consortium.
On this page you can configure the HTTP function.
Choose the menu System→Access Security→HTTP Config to load the following page.
32
Figure 4-19 HTTP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
HTTP: Select Enable/Disable the HTTP function on the switch.
Session Config
Session Timeout: If you do nothing with the Web manag
ement page within the
timeout time, the system will log out automatically. If you want to
reconfigure, please login again.
Access User Number
Number Control: Select Enable/Disable the Number Control function.
Admin Number: Enter the maximum number of the
users logging on to the Web
management page as Admin.
Guest Number:
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web
management page as Guest.
4.4.3 HTTPS Config
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the
application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) communication based on TCP. SSL is widely used to secure
the data transmission between the Web browser and servers. It is mainly applied through
ecommerce and online banking.
SSL mainly provides the following services:
1. Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data are
transmitted to the correct users and servers;
2. Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted;
3. Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission.
Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A
key pair refers to a public key (contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By
33
default the switch has a certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The
Certificate/Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.
After SSL is effective, you can log on to the Web management page via https://192.168.0.1. For
the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate, you will
be prompted that “The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted
certificate authority” or “Certificate Errors”. Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or
continue to this website.
The switch also supports HTTPS connection for IPv6. After configuring an IPv6 address (for
example, 3001::1) for the switch, you can log on to the switch’s Web management page via
https://[3001::1].
On this page you can configure the HTTPS function.
Choose the menu System → Access Security → HTTPS Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-20 HTTPS Config
34
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
HTTPS: Enable or Disable the HTTPS function on the switch.
By
default, it’s enabled.
SSL Version 3: Enable or Disable the
Secure Sockets Layer Version 3.0. By
default, it’s enabled.
TLS Version 1: Enable or Disable the
Transport Layer Security Version 1.0.
By default, it’s enabled.
CIPHERSUITE
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5: Key exchange with RC4 128-bit encryption and
MD5 for
message digest. By default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA: Key exchange with RC4 128-bit encryption and
SHA for
message digest. By default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA: Key exchange with DES-CBC for message encryption and
SHA for message digest. By default, it’s enabled.
RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC
_SHA:
Key exchange with 3DES and DES-EDE3-CBC for message
encryption and SHA for message digest. By default, it’s
enabled.
Session Config
Session Timeout: If you do nothing with the Web management page within the
timeout time, the system will log out automaticall
y. If you want
to reconfigure, please login again.
Access User Number
Number Control: Enable or Disable the Number Control function.
Admin Number:
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the
Web management page as Admin.
Guest Number: Enter
the maximum number of the users logging on to the
Web management page as Guest.
Certificate Download
Certificate File:
Select the desired certificate to download to the switch. The
certificate must be BASE64 encoded.
Key Download
Key File: Select the d
esired Key to download to the switch. The key
must be BASE64 encoded.
35
Note:
1. The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other; otherwise the HTTPS
connection will not work.
2. To establish a secured connection using https, please enter https:// into the URL field of the
browser.
3. It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection, because https
connection involves authentication, encryption and decryption etc.
4.4.4 SSH Config
As stipulated by IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force), SSH (Secure Shell) is a security protocol
established on application and transport layers. SSH-encrypted-connection is similar to a telnet
connection, but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe, because the
password and data transmitted with plain-text can be easily intercepted. SSH can provide
information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through
an insecure network environment. It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the
information in a remote management being leaked.
Comprising server and client, SSH has two versions, V1 and V2 which are not compatible with
each other. In the communication, SSH server and client can auto-negotiate the SSH version and
the encryption algorithm. After getting a successful negotiation, the client sends authentication
request to the server for login, and then the two can communicate with each other after successful
authentication. This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH
connection using SSH client software.
SSH key can be downloaded into the switch. If the key is successfully downloaded, the certificate
authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch.
Choose the menu System → Access Security → SSH Config to load the following page.
36
Figure 4-21 SSH Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
SSH: Enable or Disable the SSH function. By default, it’s disabled.
Protocol V1: Enable or Disable the SSH V1 to be the supported protocol.
Protocol V2: Enable or Disable the SSH V2 to be the supported protocol.
Idle Timeout:
Specify the idle timeout time. The system will automatically
release the connection when t
he time is up. The default time is
120 seconds.
Max Connect:
Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH
server. No new connection will be established when the number of
the connections reaches the maximum number you set. The
default value is 5.
Encryption Algorithm
Check the box to enable the corresponding encryption algorithm.
Data Integrity Algorithm
Check the box to enable the corresponding data integrity algorithm.
37
Key Download
Key Type: Select the type of SSH Key to download. The switch supports two
types: SSH-2 RSA/DSA and SSH-1 RSA.
Key File: Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is in the range
of 512 to 3072 bits.
Download: Click the Download button to download
the desired key file to the
switch.
Note:
It will take a long time to download the key file. Please wait without any operation.
Application Example 1 for SSH:
Network Requirements
1. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled
on the switch.
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.
Configuration Procedure
1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch into
Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the Connection
type.
38
2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name and
password, and then you can continue to configure the switch.
Application Example 2 for SSH:
Network Requirements
1. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled
on the switch.
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.
Configuration Procedure
1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.
Note:
1. The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.
2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key
generation.
39
2. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to the
computer.
3. On the Web management page of the switch, download the public key file saved in the
computer to the switch.
Note:
1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file.
2. The SSH key downloading cannot be interrupted.
40
4. After the public key is downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP
address for login.
5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.
41
After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the switch
without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded.
Note:
Following the steps above, you have already entered the User EXEC Mode of the switch. However,
to configure the switch, you need a password to enter the Privileged EXEC Mode first. For a switch
with factory settings, the Privileged EXEC Mode password can only be configured through the
console connection. For how to configure the Privileged EXEC Mode password, please refer to the
1.1.2 Configuring the Privileged EXEC Mode Password in CLI Reference Guide.
4.4.5 Telnet Config
On this page you can Enable/Disable Telnet function globally on the switch.
Choose the menu System→Access Security→Telnet Config to load the following page.
Figure 4-22 Telnet Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Telnet: Enable or Disable the Telnet function globally on the switch.
Return to CONTENTS
42
Chapter 5 Switching
Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch, including four submenus:
Port, LAG, Traffic Monitor and MAC Address.
5.1 Port
The Port function, allowing you to configure the basic features for the port, is implemented on the
Port Config, Port Mirror, Port Security, Port Isolation and Loopback Detection pages.
5.1.1 Port Config
On this page, you can configure the basic parameters for the ports. When the port is disabled, the
packets on the port will be discarded. Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce
the power consumption effectively. And you can enable the port when it is in need.
The parameters will affect the working mode of the port, please set the parameters appropriate to
your needs.
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 5-1 Port Config
Here you can view and configure the port parameters.
Port Config
Port Select
: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding por
t
based on the port number you entered.
Select
: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
43
Port
: Displays the port number.
Description
: Give a description to the port for identification.
Status
: Allows you to Enable/Disable the po
rt. When Enable is
selected, the port can forward the packets normally.
Speed and Duplex
:
Select the Speed and Duplex mode for the port. The device
connected to the switch should be in the same Speed and
Duplex mode with the switch. When “Auto” is select
ed, the
Speed and Duplex mode will be determined by
auto-negotiation. For the SFP port, this switch
does not support
auto-negotiation.
Flow Control
:
Allows you to Enable/Disable the Flow Control feature. When
Flow Control is enabled, the switch can synch
ronize the speed
with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion.
LAG
: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. The switch cannot be managed through the disabled port. Please enable the port which is
used to manage the switch.
2. The parameters of the port members in a LAG should be set as the same.
3. When using the SFP port with a 100M module or a gigabit module, you need to configure its
corresponding Speed and Duplex mode. For 100M module, please select 100MFD while
select 1000MFD for gigabit module. By default, the Speed and Duplex mode of SFP port is
1000MFD.
5.1.2 Port Mirror
Port Mirror, the packets obtaining technology, functions to forward copies of packets from
one/multiple ports (mirrored port) to a specific port (mirroring port). Usually, the mirroring port is
connected to a data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for monitoring
and troubleshooting the network.
44
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Mirror to load the following page.
Figure 5-2 Mirror Group List
The following entries are displayed on this screen.
Mirror Group List
Group: Displays the mirror group number.
Mirroring: Displays the mirroring port number.
Mode: Displays the mirror mode, the value will be "Ingress" or "Egress".
Mirrored Port: Displays the mirrored ports.
Operation: Click Edit to configure the mirror group.
45
Click Edit to display the following figure.
Figure 5-3 Port Mirror Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen.
Mirror Group
Number: Select the mirror group number you want to configure.
Mirroring Port
Mirroring Port: Select the mirroring port number.
Mirrored Port
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port as a mirrored port. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
Ingress: Select Enable/Disable the Ingress feature. When the Ingress is
enabled, the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will
be copied to the mirroring port.
46
Egress: Select Enable/Disable the Egress feature. When the Egress is
enabled, the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be
copied to the mirroring port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to. The LAG
member cannot
be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring
port.
Note:
1. The LAG member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port.
2. A port cannot be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously.
3. The Port Mirror function can span the multiple VLANs.
5.1.3 Port Security
MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relationship between the port and the MAC address of
the connected device, which is the base of the packet forwarding. The capacity of MAC Address
Table is fixed. MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the
network information illegally. The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and
quickly occupy the MAC Address Table. When the MAC Address Table is full, the switch will
broadcast the packets to all the ports. At this moment, the attacker can obtain the network
information via various sniffers and attacks. When the MAC Address Table is full, the packets
traffic will flood to all the ports, which results in overload, lower speed, packets drop and even
breakdown of the system.
Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the
maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with Port Security
feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically. When the learned MAC address number
reaches the maximum, the port will stop learning. Thereafter, the other devices with the MAC
address unlearned cannot access to the network via this port.
47
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Security to load the following page.
Figure 5-4 Port Security
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Security
Select
: Select the desired port for Port Security configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port
: Displays the port number.
Max Learned MAC
: Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on the port.
Learned Num
: Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned
on the port.
Learn Mode
: Select the Learn Mode for the port.
• Dynamic: When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned
MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging
time.
• Static: When Static mode is selected, the learned MAC
address will be out of the influence of the aging time and
can only be deleted manually. The learned entries will be
cleared after the switch is rebooted.
• Permanent: When Permanent mode is selected, the
learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the
aging time and can only be deleted manually. The learned
entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.
Status
: Select Enable/Disable the Port Security feature for the port.
48
Note:
1. The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member. Only the port is removed from
the LAG, will the Port Security function be available for the port.
2. The Port Security function is disabled when the 802.1X function is enabled.
5.1.4 Port Isolation
Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by
forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist.
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Isolation to load the following page.
Figure 5-5 Port Isolation Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Isolation Config
From/To Port: Select the port number range to set its Forward Portlist.
Forward Portlist: Select the ports to be forwarded to.
49
Port Isolation List
Port: Display the port number.
Forward Portlist: Display the Forward Portlist.
5.1.5 Loopback Detection
With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback detection
packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding
port according to the port configuration.
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Loopback Detection to load the following page.
Figure 5-6 Port Isolation Config
50
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
LoopbackDetection
Status:
Here you can enable or disable Loopback Detection
function
globally.
Detection Interval: Set a Loopback Detection interval between 1 and 1000 seconds.
By default, it’s 30 seconds.
Automatic Recovery
Time:
Time after which the blocked port would automatically recover
to
normal status. It can be set as integral times of detection interval.
Web Refresh Status:
Here you can enable or disable web automatic refresh.
Web Refresh
Interval:
Set a web refresh interval between 3 and 100 seconds. By default,
it is 3 seconds.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for Loopback
Detection configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port Displays the port number.
Status Enable or disable Loopback Detection function for the port.
Operation Mode Select the mode how the switch processes the detected loops.
Alert: When a loop is detected, display an alert.
Port based: When a loop is detected, display an
alert and
block the port.
Recovery Mode Select the mode how the blocked port recovers to normal status.
Auto: Block status can be automatically
removed after
recovery time.
Manual: Block status only can be removed manually.
Loop Status Displays the port status whether a loopback is detected.
Block Status Displays the port status about block or unblock.
LAG Displays the LAG number the port belongs to.
Manual Recover Manually remove the block status of selected ports.
Note:
1. Recovery Mode is not selectable when Alert is chosen in Operation Mode.
2. Loopback Detection must coordinate with storm control.
5.2 LAG
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single
high-bandwidth data path, so as to implement the traffic load sharing among the member ports in
the group and to enhance the connection reliability.
51
For the member ports in an aggregation group, their basic configuration must be the same. The
basic configuration includes STP, QoS, GVRP, VLAN, port attributes, MAC Address Learning
mode and other associated settings. More details are explained below:
If the ports, which are enabled for the GVRP, 802.1Q VLAN, Voice VLAN, STP, QoS, DHCP
Snooping and Port Configuration (Speed and Flow Control), are in a LAG, their
configurations should be the same.
The ports, which are enabled for the half-duplex, Port Security, Port Mirror, MAC Address
Filtering, Static MAC Address Binding and 802.1X Authentication, cannot be added to the
LA G.
It’s not suggested to add the ports with ARP Inspection and DoS Defend enabled to the
LA G.
If the LAG is needed, you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the
other functions for the member ports.
Tips:
1. Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG: If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of
1000Mbps Full Duplex, the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps (2000Mbps * 4)
because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up-linked speed of
1000Mbps and the down-linked speed of 1000Mbps.
2. The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate
Arithmetic. If the connections of one or several ports are broken, the traffic of these ports will
be transmitted on the normal ports, so as to guarantee the connection reliability.
Depending on different aggregation modes, aggregation groups fall into two types: Static LAG
and LACP Config. The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table, Static LAG and LACP
Config configuration pages.
5.2.1 LAG Table
On this page, you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch.
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → LAG Table to load the following page.
Figure 5-6 LAG Table
52
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Hash Algorithm
: Select the applied scope of Aggregate Arithmetic, which
results in choosing a port to transfer the packets.
• SRC MAC + DST MAC: When this option is selected,
the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and
destination MAC addresses of the packets.
• SRC IP + DST IP: When this option is selected, the
Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and
destination IP addresses of the packets.
LAG Table
Select
: Select the desired LAG. It is multi-optional.
Group Number
: Displays the LAG number here.
Description
: Displays the description of LA G.
Member
: Displays the LAG member.
Operation
: Allows you to view or modify the information for each LAG.
• Edit: Click to modify the settings of the LAG.
• Detail: Click to get the information of the LAG.
Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG.
Figure 5-7 Detail Information
5.2.2 Static LAG
On this page, you can manually configure the LAG. The LACP feature is disabled for the member
ports of the manually added Static LAG.
53
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → Static LAG to load the following page.
Figure 5-8 Static LAG Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LAG Config
Group Number
: Select a Group Number for the LAG.
Description
: Give a description to the LAG for identification.
LAG Table
Member Port
:
Select the port as the LAG member. Clearing all the ports of
the LAG will delete this LAG.
Tips:
1. The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports.
2. A port can only be added to a LAG. If a port is the member of a LAG or is dynamically
aggregated as the LACP member, the port number will be displayed in gray and cannot be
selected.
5.2.3 LACP Config
LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic link
aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch can
dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly extend the
bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.
With the LACP feature enabled, the port will notify its partner of the system priority, system MAC,
port priority, port number and operation key (operation key is determined by the physical
properties of the port, upper layer protocol and admin key). The device with higher priority will lead
the aggregation and disaggregation. System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the
device. The smaller the system priority, the higher the priority of the device is. With the same
system priority, the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority. The device with
the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority, port number
and operation key. Only the ports with the same operation key can be selected into an aggregation
54
group. In an aggregation group, the port with smaller port priority will be considered as the
preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal; the port with smaller port number is preferred.
After an aggregation group is established, the selected ports can be aggregated together as one
port to transmit packets.
On this page, you can configure the LACP feature of the switch.
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → LACP Config to load the following page.
Figure 5-9 LACP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
System Priority:
Specify the system priority for the switch. The system pr
iority and
MAC address constitute the system identification (ID). A lower system
priority value indicates a higher system priority. When exchanging
information between systems, the system with higher priority
determines which link aggregation a link belong
s to, and the system
with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation
according to the selection of its partner.
LACP Config
Port Select
: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based
on the port number you entered.
Select
: Select the desired port for LACP configuration. It is multi-optional.
55
Port
: Displays the port number.
Admin Key
: Specify an Admin Key for the port. The member ports in a dynamic
aggregation group must have the same Admin Key.
Port Priority
: Specify a Port Priority for the port. This value determines the priority
of the port to be selected as the dynamic aggregation group
member. The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the
preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal; t
he port with
smaller port number is preferred.
Mode:
Specify LACP mode for your selected port.
Status
: Enable/Disable the LACP feature for your selected port.
LAG
: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
5.3 Traffic Monitor
The Traffic Monitor function, monitoring the traffic of each port, is implemented on the Traffic
Summary and Traffic Statistics pages.
5.3.1 Traffic Summary
Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to
monitor the traffic and analyze the network abnormity.
Choose the menu Switching → Traffic Monitor → Traffic Summary to load the following page.
Figure 5-10 Traffic Summary
56
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Aut
o Refresh:
Allows you to Enable/Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary
automatically.
Refresh Rate
: Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.
Traffic Summary
Port Select
: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port base
d
on the port number you entered.
Port
: Displays the port number.
Packets Rx
:
Displays the number of packets received on the port. The error
packets are not counted in.
Packets Tx
: Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port.
Octets Rx
: D
isplays the number of octets received on the port. The error octets
are counted in.
Octets Tx
: Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port.
Statistics
: Click the Statistics
button to view the detailed traffic statistics of the
port.
5.3.2 Traffic Statistics
Traffic Statistics screen displays the detailed traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to
monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly.
57
Choose the menu Switching → Traffic Monitor → Traffic Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 5-11 Traffic Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh
: Allows you to Enable/Disable refre
shing the Traffic Summary
automatically.
Refresh Rate
: Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.
Statistics
Port
: Enter a port number and click the Select
button to view the traffic
statistics of the corresponding port.
Received
: Displays the details of the packets received on the port.
Sent
: Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port.
Broadcast
: Displays the number of good broadcast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Mult
icast: Displays the number of good multicast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
Unicast
: Displays the number of good unicast packets received or
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.
58
Alignment Errors
: Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with a non-integral octet
(Alignment Error). The length of the packet is between 64 bytes
and 1518 bytes.
UndersizePkts
: Displays the number of the received packets (excluding error
packets) that are less than 64 bytes long.
Pkts64Octets
: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are 64 bytes long.
Pkts65to127Octets
: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 65 and 127 bytes long.
Pkts128to255Octets
: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 128 and 255 bytes long.
Pkts256to511Octets
: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 256 and 511 bytes long.
Pkts512to1023Octets
: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long.
Pkts
Over1023Octets: Displays the number of the received packets (including error
packets) that are over 1023 bytes.
Collisions
: Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during
packet transmissions.
5.4 MAC Address
The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports based on the
destination MAC address of the packets. Address Table contains the port-based MAC address
information, which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly. The entries in the Address
Table can be updated by auto-learning or configured manually. Most entries are generated and
updated by auto-learning. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries can enhance the
efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably, and the address filtering feature allows the switch to
filter the undesired packets and forbid its forwarding so as to improve the network security.
The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following:
Type Configuration Way
Aging out after
reboot
Relationship between the address
and the port
Static Manually binding No Being kept The MAC address cannot be learned
by the other ports in the same VLAN.
Dynamic Auto-learning Yes Clear The MAC address can be learned by
the other ports in the same VLAN.
Filtering Manually binding No Being kept -
Table 5-1 Types and features of Address Table
This function includes four submenus: Address Table, Static Address, Dynamic Address and
Filtering Address.
59
5.4.1 Address Table
On this page, you can view all the information of the Address Table.
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Address Table to load the following page.
Figure 5-12 Address Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
MAC Address
: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
VLAN ID
: Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry.
Port
: Select the corresponding port number of your desired entry.
Type
: Select the type of your desired entry.
All: This option allows the address table to display all
the
address entries.
Static:
This option allows the address table to display the static
address entries only.
Dynamic:
This option allows the address table to display the
dynamic address entries only.
Filtering: This option allows the address table to dis
play the
filtering address entries only.
60
Address Table
MAC Address
: Displays the MAC address learned by the switch.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address.
Type
: Displays the Type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the Aging status of the MAC address.
5.4.2 Static Address
The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed
manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries
can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of
packets forwarding without learning the address. The static MAC address learned by the port with
Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table.
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Static Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-13 Static Address
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Static Address
MAC Address
: Enter the static MAC Address to be bound.
VLAN ID
: Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Select a port from the pull-down list to be bound.
61
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the
Search
button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table.
• MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
• VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
• Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.
Static Address Table
Select
: Select the entry to delete or modify
the corresponding port number. It
is multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the static MAC Address.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
:
Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address. Here
you can modify the p
ort number to which the MAC address is bound.
The new port should be in the same VLAN.
Type
: Displays the Type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.
Note:
1. If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct, or the connected port (or
the device) has been changed, the switch cannot forward the packets correctly. Please reset
the static address entry appropriately.
2. If the MAC address of a device has been added to the Static Address Table, connecting the
device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch.
Therefore, please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid.
3. The MAC address in the Static Address Table cannot be added to the Filtering Address Table
or bound to a port dynamically.
5.4.3 Dynamic Address
The dynamic address can be generated by the auto-learning mechanism of the switch. The
Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto-learning or the MAC address aging out
mechanism.
To fully utilize the MAC address table, which has a limited capacity, the switch adopts an aging
mechanism for updating the table. That is, the switch removes the MAC address entries related to
a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time.
On this page, you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry.
62
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Dynamic Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-14 Dynamic Address
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Aging Config
Auto Aging
: Allows you to Enable/Disable the Auto Aging feature.
Aging Time
: Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address.
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the
Search
button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table.
• MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
• VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
• Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.
• LAG ID: Enter the LAG ID number of your desired entry.
63
Dynamic Address Table
Select
:
Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC
address to the corresponding port statically. It is multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the dynamic MAC Address.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Port
: Displays the corresponding port number of the MAC address.
Type
: Displays the Type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.
Bind
: Click the Bind
button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry to
the corresponding port statically.
Tips:
Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging. The aging time that is
too long or too short results in a decrease the performance of the switch. If the aging time is too
long, excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address
table. This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time. If the
aging time is too short, the switch may remove valid MAC address entries. This decreases the
forwarding performance of the switch. It is recommended to keep the default value.
5.4.4 Filtering Address
The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded. The filtering address can
be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. The filtering MAC address allows
the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or
destination address, so as to guarantee the network security. The filtering MAC address entries
act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN.
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Filtering Address to load the following page.
Figure 5-15 Filtering Address
64
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Filtering Address
MAC Address
: Enter the MAC Address to be filtered.
VLAN ID
: Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Search Option
Search Option
: Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search
button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table.
• MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.
• VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.
Filtering Address Table
Select
: Select the ent
ry to delete the corresponding filtering address. It is
multi-optional.
MAC Address
: Displays the filtering MAC Address.
VLAN ID
: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID.
Port
: Here the symbol “__” indicates no specified port.
Type
: Displays the Type of the MAC address.
Aging Status
: Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.
Note:
1. The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table cannot be added to the Static Address Table
or bound to a port dynamically.
2. This MAC address filtering function is not available if the 802.1X feature is enabled.
Return to CONTENTS
65
Chapter 6 VLAN
The traditional Ethernet is a data network communication technology based on CSMA/CD (Carrier
Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect) via shared communication medium. Through the
traditional Ethernet, the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision, flooding broadcasts,
poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet. Though connecting the LANs through
switches can avoid the serious collision, the flooding broadcasts cannot be prevented, which will
occupy plenty of bandwidth resources, causing potential serious security problems.
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical
scheme rather than the physical layout. The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control
broadcast in LANs. By creating VLANs in a physical LAN, you can divide the LAN into multiple
logical LANs, each of which has a broadcast domain of its own. Hosts in the same VLAN
communicate with one another as if they are in a LAN. However, hosts in different VLANs cannot
communicate with one another directly. Therefore, broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN. Hosts
in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs
communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as router, the Layer 3 switch, etc.
The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation.
Figure 6-1 VLAN implementation
Compared with the traditional Ethernet, VLAN enjoys the following advantages.
（1） Broadcasts are confined to VLANs. This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves
network performance.
（2） Network security is improved. VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly. That
is, a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly, unless routers or
Layer 3 switches are used.
（3） Network configuration workload for the host is reduced. VLAN can be used to group
specific hosts. When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN,
you need not to change its network configuration.
A VLAN can span across multiple switches, or even routers. This enables hosts in a VLAN to be
dispersed in a looser way. That is, hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network
segments. This switch supports three ways, namely, 802.1Q VLAN, MAC VLAN and Protocol
VLAN, to classify VLANs. VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify
66
packets of different VLANs. The switch can analyze the received untagged packets on the port and
match the packets with the MAC VLAN, Protocol VLAN and 802.1Q VLAN in turn. If a packet is
matched, the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it and forward it in the corresponding
VLAN.
6.1 802.1Q VLAN
VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs. The
switch works at the data link layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation
of the packet only, so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer encapsulation for
identification.
In 1999, IEEE issues the IEEE 802.1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation, defining the
structure of VLAN-tagged packets. IEEE 802.1Q protocol defines that a 4-byte VLAN tag is
encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information
about VLAN.
As shown in the following figure, a VLAN tag contains four fields, including TPID (Tag Protocol
Identifier), Priority, CFI (Canonical Format Indicator), and VLAN ID.
Figure 6-2 Format of VLAN Tag
（1） TPID: TPID is a 16-bit field, indicating that this data frame is VLAN-tagged. By default, it is
0x8100 in this switch.
（2） Priority: Priority is a 3-bit field, referring to 802.1p priority. Refer to section “QoS & QoS
profile” for details.
（3） CFI: CFI is a 1-bit field, indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the
standard format in different transmission media. This field is not described in detail in this
chapter.
（4） VLAN ID: VLAN ID is a 12-bit field, indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet
belongs. It is in the range of 0 to 4,095. Generally, 0 and 4,095 is not used, so the field is in
the range of 1 to 4,094.
VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs. When the switch receives an untagged
packet, it will encapsulate a VLAN tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound port for the packet,
and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for transmission.
In this User Guide, the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged
packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag, and the priority-tagged packet refers to the packet
with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0.
Link Types of ports
When creating the 802.1Q VLAN, you should set the link type for the port according to its
connected device. The link types of port including the following three types:
（1） ACCESS: The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN, and the egress rule of the
port is UNTAG. The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID. If the ACCESS port is added to
another VLAN, it will be removed from the current VLAN automatically.
67
（2） TRUNK: The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs, and the egress rule of the port
is TAG. The TRUNK port is generally used to connect the cascaded network devices for it
can receive and forward the packets of multiple VLANs. When the packets are forwarded
by the TRUNK port, its VLAN tag will not be changed.
（3） GENERAL: The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress
rules according to the different VLANs. The default egress rule is UNTAG. The PVID can
be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.
PVID
PVID (Port VLAN ID) is the default VID of the port. When the switch receives an untagged packet,
it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward the
packets.
When creating VLANs, the PVID of each port, indicating the default VLAN to which the port
belongs, is an important parameter with the following two purposes:
（1） When the switch receives an untagged packet, it will add a VLAN tag to the packet
according to the PVID of its received port
（2） PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port, i.e. when the port receives UL
packets or broadcast packets, the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN.
Different packets, tagged or untagged, will be processed in different ways, after being received by
ports of different link types, which is illustrated in the following table.
Port Type
Receiving Packets
Forwarding Packets
Untagged Packets Tagged Packets
Access
When untagged
packets are
received, the port
will add the default
VLAN tag, i.e. the
PVID of the ingress
port, to the packets.
If the VID of packet is
the same as the PVID
of the port, the packet
will be received.
If the VID of packet is
not the same as the
PVID of the port, the
packet will be dropped.
The packet will be
forwarded after removing its
VLAN tag.
Trunk
If the VID of packet is
allowed by the port, the
packet will be received.
If the VID of packet is
forbidden by the port,
t
he packet will be
dropped.
The packet will be
forwarded with its current
VLAN tag.
General
If the egress rule of port is
TAG, the packet will be
forwarded with its current
VLAN tag.
If the egress rule of port is
UNTAG, the packet will be
forwarded after removing its
VLAN tag.
Table 6-1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing
68
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages.
6.1.1 VLAN Config
On this page, you can view the current created 802.1Q VLAN.
Choose the menu VLAN → 802.1Q VLAN → VLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-3 VLAN Table
To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch, the default VLAN of all ports is set to
VLAN1. VLAN1 cannot be modified or deleted.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Table
VLAN ID Select
：
Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry
based on the VLAN ID number you entered.
Select
：
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN. It is
multi-optional.
VLAN ID
：
Displays the ID number of VLAN.
Description
：
Displays the user-defined description of VLAN.
Members
：
Displays the port members in the VLAN.
Operation
：
Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry.
• Edit: Click to modify the settings of VLAN.
• Detail: Click to get the information of VLAN.
69
Click Edit button to modify the settings of the corresponding VLAN. Click Create button to create a
new VLAN.
Figure 6-4 Create or Modify 802.1Q VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Config
VLAN ID: Enter the ID number of VLAN.
Description: Give a description to the VLAN for identification.
Check: Click the Check button to
check whether the VLAN ID you entered
is valid or not.
VLAN Members
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port to be a member of VLAN or leave it blan
k.
It's multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
70
Link Type:
Displays the Link Type of the port. It can be reset on Port Config
screen.
Egress Rule:
Select the Egress Rule for the VLAN port member. The default
egress rule is UNTAG.
• TAG: All packe
ts forwarded by the port are tagged. The
packets contain VLAN information.
• UNTAG: Packets forwarded by the port are untagged.
LAG: Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
6.1.2 Port Config
Before creating the 802.1Q VLAN, please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the
switch in order to configure the ports properly.
Choose the menu VLAN→ 802.1Q VLAN → Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 6-5 802.1Q VLAN – Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-sel
ect the corresponding entry
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number.
71
Link Type: Select the Link Type from the pull-down list for the port.
• ACCESS: Th
e ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN,
and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG. The PVID is same
as the current VLAN ID. If the current VLAN is deleted, the
PVID will be set to 1 by default.
•
TRUNK: The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs,
and
the egress rule of the port is TAG. The PVID can be set as
the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.
•
GENERAL: The GENERAL port can be added in multiple
VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different
VLANs. The default egress rule is UN
TAG. The PVID can be
set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.
PVID: Enter the PVID number of the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
VLAN: Click the Detail
button to view the information of the VLAN to
which the port belongs.
Click the Detail button to view the information of the corresponding VLAN
Figure 6-6 View the Current VLAN of Port
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN of Port
VLAN ID Select:
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry
based on the VLAN ID number you entered.
VLAN ID
：
Displays the ID number of VLAN.
VLAN Name:
Displays the user-defined description of VLAN.
Operation:
Allows you to remove the port from the current VLAN.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for
port.
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, set
the link type for the port based on its connected device.
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and
the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member
ports.
72
Step Operation Description
3
Modify/View VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Edit/Detail button to modify/view the information of the
corresponding VLAN.
4
Delete VLAN Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by
clicking the Delete button.
6.2 MAC VLAN
MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts. A
MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID. For the device in a MAC VLAN, if its MAC address
is bound to VLAN, the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still
takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members.
The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way:
1. When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current MAC
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it. If no
MAC VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the
received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for
transmission.
2. When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it based on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet will
be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.
3. If the MAC address of a Host is classified into 802.1Q VLAN, please set its connected port of
switch to be a member of this 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally.
On this page, you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table.
Choose the menu VLAN → MAC VLAN to load the following page.
Figure 6-7 Create and View MAC VLAN
73
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Table
MAC Address: Enter the MAC address.
Description:
Give a description to the MAC address for identification.
VLAN ID:
Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN. This VLAN should be one of the
802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.
MAC VLAN Table
MAC Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry based
on the MAC address you entered.
Select: Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
MAC Address: Displays the MAC address.
Description: Displays the user-defined description of the MAC address.
VLAN ID: Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.
Operation: Click the Edit
button to modify the settings of the entry. And click the
Modify button to apply your settings.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for
port
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, set
the link type for the port based on its connected device.
2
Create VLAN Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,
click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and
the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member
ports.
3
Create MAC VLAN Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN
page, create the MAC
VLAN. For the device in a MAC VLAN, it’s required to set its
connected port of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to
ensure the normal communication.
6.3 Protocol VLAN
Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol. Protocol VLANs can
be sorted by IP, IPX, DECnet, AppleTalk, Banyan and so on. Through the Protocol VLANs, the
broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position
in the network with its VLAN member role always effective. By creating Protocol VLANs, the
network administrator can manage the network clients based on their actual applications and
services effectively.
Protocol VLAN, another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol, can bind ToS provided
in the network to VLAN to realize the specific service. Through protocol VLAN, the switch can
analyze the received untagged packets on the port and match the packets with the user-defined
protocol template according to different encapsulation formats and the values of the special fields.
If a packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it automatically and thus
74
the data of specific protocol can be automatically assigned to the corresponding VLAN for
transmission. The network administrator can manage network clients based on their specific
applications and services through protocol VLAN.
Encapsulation Format of Ethernet Data
This section simply introduces the common used encapsulation format of Ethernet data to
understand the procedure for the switch to identify the protocol of packets. At present there are
two encapsulation formats of Ethernet data, Ethernet II encapsulation and 802.2/802.3
encapsulation, shown as follows:
Ethernet II encapsulation
802.2/802.3 encapsulation
DA and SA respectively refer to destination MAC address and source MAC address. The
number indicates the length of the field in bytes, for example, the length of source MAC
address is 12 bytes.
As the maximum length of Ethernet data is 1500 bytes, that is, 0x05DC in hexadecimal, the
Length field in 802.2/802.3 encapsulation ranges from 0x0000 to 0x05DC, but the Type field
in Ethernet II encapsulation ranges from 0x0600 to 0xFFF. The Type or Length field in the
range of 0x05DD to 0x05FF is recognized as illegal and will be directly discarded. The switch
identifies whether a packet is Ethernet II packet or 802.2/802.3 packet according to the
ranges of the two fields.
802.2/802.3 encapsulation contains the following three extended formats:
802.3 raw encapsulation
Only the Length field is encapsulated after source MAC address field and destination MAC
address field, followed by DATA field without other fields. Currently only IPX protocol supports
802.3 raw encapsulation format. The last two bytes of the Length field in 802.3 raw
encapsulation is 0xFFFF.
802.2LLC (Logic Link Control) encapsulation
The Length field, DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) field, SSAP (Source Service
Access Point) field and Control field are encapsulated after source MAC address field and
destination MAC address field. The value of Control field is always 3. DSAP field and SSAP
field in 802.2 LLC encapsulation are used to identify the upper layer protocol, for example,
when both the two fields are 0xE0, it indicates the upper layer protocol is IPX.
802.2 SNAP (Sub-Network Access Protocol) is encapsulated based on 802.3 standard
packets. In 802.2 SNAP encapsulation, the values of both DSAP field and SSAP field are
always 0XAA, and the value of Control field is 3. The switch differentiates 802.2 LLC and
802.2 SNAP encapsulation formats according to the values of DSAP field and SSAP field.
The device determines the encapsulation format of its sending packets, and a device can send out
packets of two encapsulation formats. Ethernet II encapsulation format is the most common used
one currently.
802.3 and Ethernet II encapsulation formats are supported in IP protocol, ARP protocol and RARP
protocol, but not supported in all protocols. The switch identifies the protocol of the packets by
matching eigenvalues of two encapsulation formats.
75
The Procedure for the Switch to Identify Packet Protocol
The Implementation of Protocol VLAN
This switch can match packets through protocol template and transmit packets in the specific
VLAN according to the protocol. Protocol template, comprising encapsulation format and protocol
type, is the standard to determine the protocol which a packet belongs to. The following table
shows the common used encapsulation formats supported in network layer protocol and the
protocol templates are for reference. Meanwhile some protocol templates has been preset in the
switch, you can create protocol VLAN according to the corresponding protocol template.
Encapsulation
Protocol Ethernet II 802.3 raw 802.2 LLC 802.2 SNAP
IP（0x0800） Supported Not
supported
Not
supported Supported
IPX（0x8137） Supported Supported Supported Supported
AppleTalk（0x809B） Supported Not
supported
Not
supported Supported
Table 6-2 Protocol types in common use
76
The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following way:
VLAN packets are processed in the following way:
1. When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag to it. If
no Protocol VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of
the received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for
transmission.
2. When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it based on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet will
be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.
3. If the Protocol VLAN is created, please set its enabled port to be the member of
corresponding 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally.
6.3.1 Protocol Group Table
On this page, you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined
Protocol VLANs.
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Group Table to load the following page.
Figure 6-8 Protocol Group Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Protocol Group Table
Select
: Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
Protocol
: Displays the protocol of the protocol group.
VLAN ID:
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol group.
Member:
Displays the member of the protocol group.
Operation:
Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the
entry. And click the
Modify button to apply your settings.
6.3.2 Protocol Group
On this page, you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined
Protocol VLANs.
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Group to load the following page.
77
Figure 6-9 Create Protocol VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Protocol Group Config
Protocol:
Select the defined protocol template.
VLAN ID:
Enter the ID number of the Protocol VLAN. This VLAN should be one
of the 802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.
Protocol Group Member
Select your desired port for Protocol VLAN Group.
6.3.3 Protocol Template
The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN. By default, the
switch has defined the IP Template, ARP Template, RARP Template, etc. You can add more
Protocol Template on this page.
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Template to load the following page.
Figure 6-10 Create and View Protocol Template
78
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Protocol Template
Protocol Name:
Give a name for the Protocol Template.
Ether Type:
Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template.
Frame Type:
Select a Frame Type for the Protocol Template.
Protocol Template Table
Select:
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.
ID
Displays the index of the protocol template.
Protocol Name:
Displays the name of the protocol template.
Ether Type:
Displays the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template.
Frame Type
Displays the Frame type field for the protocol template.
Note:
The Protocol Template bound to VLAN cannot be deleted.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for port. Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, set the link type for the port based on its connected
device.
2
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →VLAN Config
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,
specify its member ports.
3
Create Protocol Template. Required. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol
Template
page, create the Protocol Template before
configuring Protocol VLAN.
4
Create Protocol VLAN. Required. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol
VLAN page, select the protocol type and enter the VLAN ID
to create a Protocol VLAN.
5
Modify/View VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol
VLAN page, click the Edit
button to modify/view the
information of the corresponding VLAN.
6
Delete VLAN. Optional. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol
VLAN page, select the desired entr
y to delete the
corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button.
79
6.4 Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN
Network Requirements
Switch A is connecting to PC A and Server B;
Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A;
PC A and Server A is in the same VLAN;
PC B and Server B is in the same VLAN;
PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure
the link type of Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS, TRUNK and
ACCESS respectively
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2 and Port 3.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 4.
Configure Switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure
the link type of Port 7, Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS, TRUNK and
ACCESS respectively.
80
Step Operation Description
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 6 and Port 8.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 6 and Port 7.
6.5 Application Example for MAC VLAN
Network Requirements
Switch A and switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively, and
the two rooms are for all departments;
Notebook A and Notebook B, special for meeting room, are of two different departments;
The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively. The two notebooks can just
access the server of their own departments, that is, Server A and Server B, in the two meeting
rooms;
The MAC address of Notebook A is 00-19-56-8A-4C-71, Notebook B’s MAC address is
00-19-56-82-3B-70.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Lin
k Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure
the link type of Port 11 and
Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK
respectively.
2
Create VLAN10
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, ow
ning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.
81
Step Operation Description
3
Create VLAN20
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN
ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.
4
Configure MAC
VLAN 10
On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC
address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.
5
Configure MAC
VLAN 20
On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC
address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.
Configure Switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 21 and
Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK
respectively.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN
ID as 10, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN
ID as 20, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.
4
Configure MAC
VLAN 10
On VLAN→MAC VLAN
page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC
address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.
5
Configure MAC
VLAN 20
On VLAN→MAC VLAN
page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC
address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.
Configure Switch C
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL, and configure the link
type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 5,
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4,
6.6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN
Network Requirements
Department A is connected to the company LAN via Port12 of switch A;
Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host;
IP host, in VLAN10, is served by IP server while AppleTalk host is served by AppleTalk server;
Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server.
82
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch A
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS, and configure the link
type of Port 12 as GENERAL.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 1
2 and Port 13, and
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN
ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.
Configure Switch B
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the
Link Type of the
ports
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, configure
the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS, and configure the link
type of Port 3 as GENERAL.
2
Create VLAN10 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 3 and Port 4, and configure
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.
3
Create VLAN20 Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config
page, create a
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 5, and configure
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.
83
Step Operation Description
4
Create Protocol
Template
Required. On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Template page,
configure the protocol template practically. E.g. the IP network packets
are encapsulated in Ethernet II format and its Ether Type is 0800; the
AppleTalk network packets are encapsulated in SNAP format and its
PID is 809B.
5
Create Protocol
VLAN 10
On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Group page, create protocol
VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP and tick Port 3.
6
Create Protocol
VLAN 20
On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Group page, create protocol
VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk and tick Port 3.
6.7 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute
registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the
dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to
other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.
GARP
GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver, propagate and
register the information among the members. GARP itself does not work as the entity among the
devices. The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation, and GVRP is the
implementation of GARP. When GARP is implemented on a port of device, the port is called
GARP entity.
The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages. GARP defines the
messages into three types: Join, Leave and LeaveAll.
• Join Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute
information of its own, it sends out a Join message. And when receiving the Join message
from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically, the device also sends out a Join
message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities.
• Leave Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute
information of its own, it sends out a Leave message. And when receiving the Leave message
from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically, the device also sends out a
Leave message.
• LeaveAll Message: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer. After the timer
times out, the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message. LeaveAll message is to deregister
all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re-register attribute
information of their own.
Through message exchange, all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all
the switches in the same switched network.
The interval of GARP messages is controlled by timers. GARP defines the following timers:
• Hold Timer: When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information, it does not send
out a Join message immediately. Instead, to save the bandwidth resources, it starts the Hold
timer, puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join
message and sends out the message after the timer times out.
84
• Join Timer: To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities, a GARP entity sends
each Join message two times. The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two
sending operations of each Join message.
• Leave Timer: When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute information, it
sends out a Leave message. Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer,
and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before
the timer times out.
• LeaveAll Timer: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer, and sends out a
LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP entities can re-register all the
attribute information on this entity. After that, the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a
new cycle.
GVRP
GVRP, as an implementation of GARP, maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and
propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP.
After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch, the switch receives the VLAN registration
information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information,
including VLAN members, ports through which the VLAN members can be reached, and so on.
The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the
switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information. The VLAN
registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally, but
also the dynamic registration information, which is received from other switches.
In this switch, only the port with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to
maintain the VLAN registration information. GVRP has the following three port registration modes:
Normal, Fixed, and Forbidden.
• Normal: In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister a VLAN and propagate the
dynamic/static VLAN information.
• Fixed: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN dynamically. It only propagates
static VLAN information. That is, the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static
VLAN to pass.
• Forbidden: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1
information. That is, the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN
(namely VLAN 1) to pass.
85
Choose the menu VLAN →GVRP to load the following page.
Figure 6-11 GVRP Config
Note:
If the GVRP feature is enabled for a member port of LAG, please ensure all the member ports of
this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
GVRP:
Allows you to Enable/Disable the GVRP function.
Port Config
Port Sel
ect: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry based
on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Status:
Enable/Disable the GVRP feature f
or the port. The port type should be
set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature.
Registration
Mode:
Select the Registration Mode for the port.
• Normal:
In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister
a VLAN and propagate the dynamic/static VLAN information.
• Fixed:
In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN
dynamically. It only propagates static VLAN information.
86
• Forbidden: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister
VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1 information.
LeaveAll Timer:
Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send
a LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP
ports can re-register all the attribute information. After that, the
LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle. The LeaveAll Timer
ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds.
Join Timer:
To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a GARP port
sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to define
the interval between the two sending operations of each Join
message. The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds.
Leave Timer:
Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave
message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute
information if it does not receive a Join message again before the
timer times out. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000
centiseconds.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.
Note:
LeaveAll Timer >= 10* Leave Timer, Leave Timer >= 2*Join Timer
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Set the link type for port. Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →Port Config
page, set the link type of the port to be TRUNK.
2
Enable GVRP function. Required. On the VLAN →GVRP page, enable GVRP
function.
3
Configure the registration
mode and the timers for the
port.
Required. On the VLAN →GVRP
page, configure the
parameters of ports based on actual applications.
Return to CONTENTS
87
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), subject to IEEE 802.1D standard, is to disbranch a ring network in
the Data Link layer in a local network. Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block
ports by exchanging information, in that way, a ring network can be disbranched to form a
tree-topological ring-free network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly
in the network.
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use. Enough
information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation. STP is to determine the
topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices.
To implement spanning tree function, the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each
other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the
received BPDUs. BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the
spanning tree.
STP Elements
Bridge ID（Bridge Identifier）: Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge.
Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority.
Root Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID. Configure the best PC in the ring
network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability.
Designated Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root
bridge in each network segment. BPDUs are forwarded to the network segment through the
designated bridge. The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge.
Root Path Cost: Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the
switches that packets pass through. The root path cost of the root bridge is 0.
Bridge Priority: The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~32768. The lower value
priority has the higher priority. The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as
the root bridge.
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and
forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or
switch.
Port Priority: The port priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~255. The lower value priority
has the higher priority. The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root
port.
Path Cost: Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP. By calculating the path cost,
STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring-network to
form a tree-topological ring-free network.
The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree. Switch A, B and C are
connected together in order. After STP generation, switch A is chosen as root bridge, the path from
port 2 to port 6 is blocked.
Bridge: Switch A is the root bridge in the whole network; switch B is the designated bridge of
switch C.
Port: Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C; port 1 is the
designated port of switch A and port 4 is the designated port of switch B; port 6 is the blocked
port of switch C.
88
Figure 7-1 Basic STP diagram
STP Timers
Hello Time:
Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds. It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets. It is used
to test the links.
Max. Age:
Max. Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds. It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without
receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.
Forward Delay:
Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds. It specifies the time for the port to transit its state
after the network topology is changed.
When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs, the STP structure will get
some corresponding change. However, as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the
whole network at once, the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately.
Therefore, STP adopts a state transit mechanism, that is, the new root port and the designated
port begins to forward data after twice forward delay, which ensures the new configuration BPDUs
are spread in the whole network.
BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode
Assuming two BPDUs: BPDU X and BPDU Y
If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y, but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y, X is
superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID and the root path cost of X equal those of Y, but the bridge ID of X is smaller
than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
If the root bridge ID, the root path cost and bridge ID of X equal those of Y, but the port ID of X is
smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.
STP Generation
In the beginning
In the beginning, each switch regards itself as the root, and generates a configuration BPDU for
each port on it as a root, with the root path cost being 0, the ID of the designated bridge being that
of the switch, and the designated port being itself.
89
Comparing BPDUs
Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports
from another switch. The following table shows the comparing operations.
Step Operation
1 If the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of
the port itself, the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of
the port.
2 If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself,
the
switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with
those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority.
Table 7-1 Comparing BPDUs
Selecting the root bridge
The root bridge is selected by BPDU comparing. The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as
the root bridge.
Selecting the root port and designate port
The operation is taken in the following way:
Step Operation
1 For each switch (except the one chosen as the root bridge) in a network, the port
that receives the BPDU with the highest priority is chosen as the root port of the
switch.
2
Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost, the switch generates a
designated port BPDU for each of its ports.
Root ID is replaced with that of the root port;
Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and
the path cost between this port and the root port;
The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch;
The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port.
3
The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port
whose role you want to determine.
If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port, the
port i
s chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced
with the resulting BPDU. The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU;
If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU, the
BPDU of this port is not replaced and
the port is blocked. The port only can
receive BPDUs.
Table 7-2 Selecting root port and designated port
Tips
：
In a STP with stable topology, only the root port and designated port can forward data, and the
other ports are blocked. The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs.
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), evolved from the 802.1D STP standard, enable Ethernet
ports to transit their states rapidly. The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly
are as follows.
90
The condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly: The old root port of the switch
stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward
data.
The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly: The designated port is
an edge port or connecting to a point-to-point link. If the designated port is an edge port, it
can directly transit to forwarding state; if the designated port is connecting to a
point-to-point link, it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the
downstream switch through handshake.
RSTP Elements
Edge Port: Indicates the port connected directly to terminals.
P2P Link: Indicates the link between two switches directly connected.
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE
802.1s standard, not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly, but also enables packets of
different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links
with a better load-balancing mechanism.
Features of MSTP:
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table. It
binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources.
MSTP divides a spanning tree network into several regions. Each region has several
internal spanning trees, which are independent of each other.
MSTP provides a load-balancing mechanism for the packets transmission in the VLAN.
MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP.
MSTP Elements
MST Region (Multiple Spanning Tree Region): An MST Region comprises switches with the same
region configuration and VLAN-to-Instances mapping relationship.
IST (Internal Spanning Tree): An IST is a spanning tree in an MST.
CST (Common Spanning Tree): A CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all
MST regions in the network.
CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree): A CIST, comprising IST and CST, is the spanning
tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network.
91
The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP.
Figure 7-2 Basic MSTP diagram
MSTP
MSTP divides a network into several MST regions. The CST is generated between these MST
regions, and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region. Each spanning tree is
called an instance. As well as STP, MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree. The only
difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carries the MSTP configuration information on the switches.
Port States
In an MSTP, ports can be in the following four states:
Forwarding: In this status the port can receive/forward data, receive/send BPDU packets as
well as learn MAC address.
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets and learn MAC address.
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.
Disconnected: In this status the port is not participating in the STP.
Port Roles
In an MSTP, the following roles exist:
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge
and forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment
or switch.
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root. The path from
the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and the
common root.
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port.
Backup Port: Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port.
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the S T P.
92
The following diagram shows the different port roles.
Figure 7-3 Port roles
The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the switch, including four
submenus: STP Config, Port Config, MSTP Instance and STP Security.
7.1 STP Config
The STP Config function, for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch, can be
implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages.
7.1.1 STP Config
Before configuring spanning trees, you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each
spanning tree instance. Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance. On
this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters.
93
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →STP Config →STP Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-4 STP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
STP: Select Enable/Disable STP function globally on the switch.
Version: Select the desired STP version on the switch.
STP: Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
Parameters Config
CIST Priority: Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch
for comparison in the CIST. CIST priority is an important criterion
on determining the root bridge. In the same condition, the switch
with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge. The
lower value has the higher priority. The default value is 32768 and
should be exact divisor of 4096.
Hello Time Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to
send BPDU packets. It is used to test the links. 2*(Hello Time + 1)
≤ Max Age. The default value is 2 seconds.
Max Age: Enter a value from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum
time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before
attempting to reconfigure. The default value is 20 seconds.
Forward Delay: Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the
port to tr
ansit its state after the network topology is changed.
2*(Forward Delay-1) ≥ Max Age. The default value is 15 seconds.
TxHold Count: Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU
packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. The default value is
5pps.
94
Max Hops: Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops
that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. The
default value is 20 hops.
Note:
1. The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated. A too small forward
delay parameter may result in temporary loops. A too large forward delay may cause a
network unable to resume the normal state in time. The default value is recommended.
2. An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link failures occurred
in the network without occupying too much network resources. A too large hello time
parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in
the links, which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated. A too small hello time
parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently, which increases the
network load of the switches and wastes network resources. The default value is
recommended.
3. A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees
frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems. A too large
max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time, which in
turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less
adaptive. The default value is recommended.
4. If the TxHold Count parameter is too large, the number of MSTP packets being sent in each
hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources. The default value is
recommended.
7.1.2 STP Summary
On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function.
95
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →STP Config →STP Summary to load the following page.
Figure 7-5 STP Summary
7.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST
96
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 7-6 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based
on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for STP configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Status: Select Enable /Disable STP function for the desired port.
Priority: Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16. Port priority is an important
criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen
as the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
ExtPath: ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs
of ports in different MST regions. It is an important criterion on
determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
IntPath: IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of
ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
Edge Port: Select Enable/Disable Edge Port. The edge port can transit its state
from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay.
P2P Link: Select the P2P link status. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port
or designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to
reduce the unnecessary forward delay.
MCheck: Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port. Unchange
means no MCheck operation.
STP Version: Displays the STP version of the port.
97
Port Role: Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance.
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from
this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root.
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a
downstream network segment or switch.
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the
common root. The path from the master port to the common root
is the shortest path between this MST region and the common
root.
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a
root or master port.
Backup Port: Indicates the port
that is the backup port of a
designated port.
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP.
Port Status: Displays the working status of the port.
Forwarding: In this status the port can receive/forward data,
receive/send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address.
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets
and learn MAC address.
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.
Disconnected: In this status the port is not participating in the STP.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU
protection function as well. This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state
rapidly but also secures your network.
2. All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point-to-point links.
3. When the link of a port is configured as a point-to-point link, the spanning tree instances
owning this port are configured as point-to-point links. If the physical link of a port is not a
point-to-point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point-to-point link, temporary loops
may be incurred.
7.3 MSTP Instance
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table
(VLAN-to-spanning-tree mapping). By adding MSTP instances, it binds several VLANs to an
instance to realize the load balance based on instances.
Only when the switches have the same MST region name, MST region revision and
VLAN-to-Instance mapping table, the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region.
The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config, Instance Config and
Instance Port Config pages.
7.3.1 Region Config
On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region
98
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Region Config to load the following
page.
Figure 7-7 Region Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Region Config
Region Name: Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters.
Revision: Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification.
7.3.2 Instance Config
Instance Configuration, a property of MST region, is used to describe the VLAN to Instance
mapping configuration. You can assign VLAN to different instances appropriate to your needs.
Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST.
99
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Instance Config to load the following
page.
Figure 7-8 Instance Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Instance Table
Instance ID Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding Instance ID
based on the ID number you entered.
Select: Select the desired Instance ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Instance: Displays Instance ID of the switch.
Status: Displays status of the instance.
Priority: Ente
r the priority of the switch in the instance. It is an important
criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge
in the specific instance.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID.
After modificati
on here, the previous VLAN ID will be cleared and
mapped to the CIST.
Clear: Click the Clear button to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID.
The cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST.
100
VLAN-Instance Mapping
VLAN ID: Enter the desired VLAN ID. After modification here, the new VLAN ID
will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous VLAN
ID won’t be replaced.
Instance ID: Enter the corresponding instance ID.
Note:
In a network with both GVRP and MSTP enabled, GVRP packets are forwarded along the CIST. If
you want to broadcast packets of a specific VLAN through GVRP, please be sure to map the VLAN
to the CIST when configuring the MSTP VLAN-instance mapping table. For detailed introduction of
GVRP, please refer to GVRP function page.
7.3.3 Instance Port Config
A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance. On this page you can configure
the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the
specified instance.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Instance Port Config to load the
following page.
Figure 7-9 Instance Port Config
101
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Instance ID: Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration.
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based
on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port to specify its priority and path cost. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Priority: Enter the priority of the port in the instance. It is an important criterion
on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the
root port.
Path Cost: Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of
ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.
Port Role: Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance.
Port Status: Displays the working status of the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different.
Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function:
Step Operation Description
1 Make clear roles the switches
play in spanning tree
instances: root bridge or
designated bridge
Preparation.
2
Globally configure MSTP
parameters
Required.
Enable Spanning Tree function on the switch
and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning Tree →
STP Config → STP Config page.
3
Configure MSTP parameters
for ports
Required.
Configure MSTP parameters for ports on
Spanning Tree → Port Config → Port Config page.
4 Configure the MST region Required. Create MST region and configure the role the
switch plays in the MST region on Spanning Tree →
MSTP Instance → Region Config and Instance Config
page.
5
Configure MSTP parameters
for instance ports
Optional. Configure different instances in the MST region
and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on
Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance →
Instance Port
Config page.
102
7.4 STP Security
Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against
STP features. The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect
pages.
Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features.
7.4.1 Port Protect
On this page you can configure loop protect feature, root protect feature, TC protect feature,
BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports. You are suggested to enable
corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports.
Loop Protect
In a stable network, a switch maintains the states of ports by receiving and processing BPDU
packets from the upstream switch. However, when link congestions or link failures occurred to the
network, a down stream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period, which results in
spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected, and causes the blocked
ports to transit to forwarding state. Therefore, loops may be incurred in the network.
The loop protect function can suppresses loops. With this function enabled, a port, regardless of
the role it plays in instances, is always set to blocking state, when the port does not receive BPDU
packets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated, and thereby loops can be
prevented.
Root Protect
A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high-bandwidth core region.
Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher
priorities being received by the legal root bridge, which causes the current legal root bridge to lose
its position and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that should travel along
high-speed links may lead to low-speed links, and network congestion may occur.
To avoid this, MSTP provides root protect function. Ports with this function enabled can only be set
as designated ports in all spanning tree instances. When a port of this type receives BDPU
packets with higher priority, it transits its state to blocking state and stops forwarding packets (as if
it is disconnected from the link). The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any
configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for a period of two times of forward delay.
TC Protect
A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDU packets. If a user maliciously
sends a large amount of TC-BPDU packets to a switch in a short period, the switch will be busy
with removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and stability of the
network.
To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries, you can enable the TC
protect function on the switch. With TC protect function enabled, if the account number of the
received TC-BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field, the switch
will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle. Such a mechanism prevents the
switch from frequently removing MAC address entries.
BPDU Protect
Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly
transit their states. When these ports receive BPDUs, the system automatically configures these
ports as non-edge ports and regenerates spanning trees, which may cause network topology jitter.
103
Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs, but if a user maliciously attacks the switch by sending
BPDUs, network topology jitter occurs.
To prevent this attack, MSTP provides BPDU protect function. With this function enabled on the
switch, the switch shuts down the edge ports that receive BPDUs and reports these cases to the
administrator. If a port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it.
BPDU Filter
BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network. If a switch receives malicious
BPDUs, it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network, which may result in
spanning trees being continuously regenerated. In this case, the switch occupying too much CPU
or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong.
With BPDU filter function enabled, a port does not receive or forward BPDUs, but it sends out its
own BPDUs. Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to
guarantee generation the spanning trees correct.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → STP Security → Port Protect to load the following page.
Figure 7-10 Port Protect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Protect
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based
on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port for port protect configuration. It is
multi-optional.
104
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Loop Protect: Loop Prot
ect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by
recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions.
Root Protect: Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by
the role change of the current legal root bridge.
TC Protect: TC Protect is to prevent the decrease of the performance and stability
of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC address entries
upon receiving TC-BPDUs in the STP network.
BPDU Protect: BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from
being attacked by
maliciously created BPDUs
BPDU Filter: BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
7.4.2 TC Protect
When TC Protect is enabled for the port on Port Protect page, the TC threshold and TC protect
cycle need to be configured on this page.
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → STP Security → TC Protect to load the following page.
Figure 7-11 TC Protect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
TC Protect
TC Threshold:
Enter a number from 1 to 100. It is the maximum number of the
TC-
BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle. The
default value is 20.
TC Protect Cycle: Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cy
cle. The
default value is 5.
7.5 Application Example for STP Function
Network Requirements
Switch A, B, C, D and E all support MSTP function.
A is the central switch.
B and C are switches in the convergence layer. D, E and F are switches in the access layer.
There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101-VLAN106 in the network.
All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region.
The data in VLAN101, 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge. The
data in VLAN102, 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge.
105
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure Switch A:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link type
of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports to
VLAN101-VLAN106
. The detailed instructions can be
found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config page,
enable STP function and select MSTP version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config page,
enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region Config
page, configure the region as TP-
LINK and keep the
default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-
Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map
VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
Configure Switch B:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports
to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detai
led instructions
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config
page, enable STP function and select MSTP
version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config
page, enable MSTP function for the port.
106
Step Operation Description
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table
of the MST
region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
5 Configure switch B as the root
bridge of Instance 1
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to
be 0.
6
Configure switch B as the
designated bridge of Instance 2
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to
be 4096.
Configure Switch C:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports
to VLAN101-VLAN106
. The detailed instructions
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config
page, enable STP function and select MSTP
version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config
page, enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST
region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
5 Configure switch C as the root
bridge of Instance 1
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to
be 4096.
6 Configure switch C as the root
bridge of Instance 2
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to
be 0.
107
Configure Switch D:
Step Operation Description
1 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports
to VLAN101-VLAN106
. The detailed instructions
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.
2 Enable STP function On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config
page, enable STP function and select MSTP
version.
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config
page, enable MSTP function for the port.
3 Configure the region name and
the revision of MST region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and
keep the default revision setting.
4 Configure VLAN-to-Instance
mapping table of the MST
region
On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance
Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.
The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D.
The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable
For Instance 1 (VLAN 101, 103 and 105), the red paths in the following figure are connected
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.
For Instance 2 (VLAN 102, 104 and 106), the blue paths in the following figure are connected
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.
108
Suggestion for Configuration
Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches.
Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges.
Enable Loop Protect function for the non-edge ports.
Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to
the PC and server.
Return to CONTENTS
109
Chapter 8 Multicast
Multicast Overview
In the network, packets are sent in three modes: unicast, broadcast and multicast. In unicast, the
source server sends separate copy information to each receiver. When a large number of users
require this information, the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to
the users. Therefore, large bandwidth will be occupied. In broadcast, the system transmits
information to all users in a network. Any user in the network can receive the information, no
matter the information is needed or not.
Point-to-multipoint multimedia business, such as video conferences and VoD (video-on-demand),
plays an important part in the information transmission field. Suppose a point to multi-point service
is required, unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users, whereas broadcast is suitable for
networks with densely distributed users. When the number of users requiring this information is
not certain, unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency. Multicast solves this problem. It can
deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi-point service, which can save large
bandwidth and reduce the network load. In multicast, the packets are transmitted in the following
way as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Information transmission in the multicast mode
Features of multicast:
1. The number of receivers is not certain. Usually point-to-multipoint transmission is needed;
2. Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group. The multicast
information sender just need to send the information to the network device once;
3. Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time;
4. Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed.
110
IPv4 Multicast Address
1. IPv4 Multicast IP Address:
As specified by IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), Class D IP addresses are used as
destination addresses of multicast packets. The multicast IP addresses range from
224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255. The following table displays the range and description of several
special multicast IP addresses.
Multicast IP address range Description
224.0.0.0～224.0.0.255 Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols
and other network protocols
224.0.1.0～224.0.1.255 Addresses for video conferencing
239.0.0.0～239.255.255.255
Local management multicast addresses, which are
used in the local network only
Table 8-1 Range of the special multicast IP
2. IPv4 Multicast MAC Address:
When a unicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the destination MAC address is the
MAC address of the receiver. When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the
destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members, so a multicast MAC
address, a logical MAC address, is needed to be used as the destination address.
As stipulated by IANA, the high-order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01-00-5E
while the low-order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low-order 23 bits of the multicast IP
address. The mapping relationship is described as Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv4 address and multicast MAC address
The high-order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110, identifying the multicast group. Only 23
bits of the remaining low-order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address. In that way, 5 bits
of the IP multicast address is not utilized. As a result, 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the
same MAC addresses.
IPv6 Multicast Address
1. IPv6 Multicast Address
An IPv6 multicast address is an identifier for a group of interfaces, and has the following format:
111
0XFF at the start of the address identifies the address as being a multicast address.
Flags have 4 bits:
(1) The high-order flag is reserved, and must be initialized to 0.
(2) R: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address does not contain an embedded RP
address; set to 1 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address contains an embedded RP address.
When this bit is set to 1, the P and T bits must also be set to 1.
(3) P: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address is not based on a unicast prefix; set to 1 to
indicate this IPv6 multicast address is based on a unicast prefix. When this bit is set to 1,
the T bit must also be set to 1.
(4) T: Set to 0 to indicate that this address is an IPv6 multicast address permanently assigned
by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA); set to 1 to indicate that this address is
a transient, or dynamically assigned IPv6 multicast address.
Scope is a 4-bit value used to limit the scope of the multicast group. The values are as follows:
Value Indication
0、3、F reserved
1 Interface-Local scope
2 Link-Local scope
4 Admin-Local scope
5 Site-Local scope
6、7、9～D unassigned
8 Organization-local scope
E Global scope
Table 8-2 Indications of the Scope
Group ID: 112 bits, IPv6 multicast group identifier that uniquely identifies an IPv6 multicast
group in the scope defined by the Scope field.
112
Reserved Multicast Addresses:
Address Indication
FF01::1 All interface-local IPv6 nodes
FF02::1 All link-local IPv6 nodes
FF01::2 All interface-local IPv6 routers
FF02::2 All link-local IPv6 routers
FF05::2 All site-local IPv6 routers
FF0X::
X ranges from 0 to F. These multicast addresses are
reserved and shall never be assigned to any multicast
group.
Table 8-3 Reserved IPv6 Multicast Addresses
The solicited-node multicast address is a multicast group that corresponds to an IPv6 unicast or
anycast address. It is usually used for obtaining the Layer 2 link-layer addresses of neighboring
nodes within the local-link or applied in IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection. A node is required to
join the associated Solicited-Node multicast addresses for all unicast and anycast addresses that
have been configured for the node's interfaces.
IPv6 Solicited-Node Multicast Address Format:
FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FFXX:XXXX
The IPv6 solicited-node multicast address has the prefix FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FF00:0000/104
concatenated with the 24 low-order bits of a corresponding IPv6 unicast or anycast address.
2. IPv6 Multicast MAC Address
The high-order 16 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address begins with 0x3333 while the low-order
32 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address are the low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address.
The mapping relationship is described as the following figure:
Figure 8-3 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv6 address and multicast IPv6 MAC address
The high-order 16 bits of the IP multicast address are 0x3333, identifying the IPv6 multicast group.
The low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address are mapped to the multicast MAC address.
113
Multicast Address Table
The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table. As the
transmission of multicast packets cannot span the VLAN, the first part of the multicast address
table is VLAN ID, based on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN
owning the receiving port. The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group
port list. When forwarding a multicast packet, the switch looks up the multicast address table
based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet. If the corresponding entry
cannot be found in the table, the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving
port. If the corresponding entry can be found in the table, it indicates that the destination address
should be a group port list, so the switch will deliver this multicast data to each port. The general
format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 8-4 below.
VLAN ID
Multicast IP
Port
Figure 8-4 Multicast Address Table
IGMP Snooping
In the network, the hosts apply to the near router for joining (leaving) a multicast group by sending
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) messages. When the up-stream device forwards
down the multicast data, the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts. IGMP Snooping is
a multicast control mechanism, which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the
multicast group. The switch, running IGMP Snooping, manages and controls the multicast group via
listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast
router, thereby effectively prevents multicast groups being broadcasted in the network.
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery（MLD）snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.
The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch, including
three submenus: IGMP Snooping, MLD Snooping and Multicast Table.
8.1 IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping Process
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host
and the router, and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port. When receiving IGMP
report message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to
IGMP leave message from the host, the router sends the Group-Specific Query message of the
port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the router will receive IGMP report message;
if no, the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from
the multicast address table. The router regularly sends IGMP query messages. After receiving the
IGMP query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the
switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time.
IGMP Messages
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows.
1. IGMP Query Message
IGMP query message, sent by the router, falls into two types, IGMP general query message and
IGMP group-specific-query message. The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query
114
if the multicast groups contain any member. When receiving IGMP leave message, the receiving
port of the router will send IGMP group-specific-query message to the multicast group and the
switch will forward IGMP group-specific-query message to check if other members in the multicast
group of the port need this multicast.
When receiving IGMP general query message, the switch will forward them to all other ports in the
VLAN owning the receiving port. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a
router port yet, it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified; if the
receiving port is already a router port, its router port time will be directly reset.
When receiving IGMP group-specific-query message, the switch will send the group-specific query
message to the members of the multicast group being queried.
2. IGMP Report Message
IGMP report message is sent by the host when it applies for joining a multicast group or responses
to the IGMP query message from the router.
When receiving IGMP report message, the switch will send the report message via the router port
in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host
applies for joining. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port,
it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified; if the receiving
port is already a member port, its member port time will be directly reset.
3. IGMP Leave Message
The host, running IGMPv1, does not send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group,
as a result, the switch cannot get the leave information of the host momentarily. However, after
leaving the multicast group, the host does not send IGMP report message any more, so the switch
will remove the port from the corresponding multicast address table when its member port time
times out. The host, running IGMPv2 or IGMPv3, sends IGMP leave message when leaving a
multicast group to inform the multicast router of its leaving.
When receiving IGMP leave message, the switch will forward IGMP group-specific-query message
to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast and reset the
member port time to the leave time. When the leave time times out, the switch will remove the port
from the corresponding multicast group. If no other member is in the group after the port is
removed, the switch will send IGMP leave message to the router and remove the whole multicast
group.
IGMP Snooping Fundamentals
1. Ports
Router Port: Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router.
Member Port: Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member.
2. Timers
Router Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the
router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. The default value is 300 seconds.
Member Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the
member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. The default value is 260
seconds.
Leave Time: Indicates the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and
the switch removing the host from the multicast groups. The default value is 1 second.
115
The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on the following pages: Snooping Config,
VLAN Config, Port Config, IP-Range, Multicast VLAN, Static Multicast IP and Packet
Statistics.
8.1.1 Snooping Config
To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure IGMP global configuration
and related parameters on this page.
If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table, the
switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN. When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled,
the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth and enhance the
process efficiency of the system. Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs.
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Snooping Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-5 Basic Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
IGMP Snooping:
Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping function globally on the
switch.
Unknown Multicast:
Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast,
Forward or Discard.
IGMP Snooping Status
Description: Displays IGMP Snooping status.
Member: Displays the member of the corresponding status.
8.1.2 VLAN Config
Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs. On this page you can
configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs.
116
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-6 VLAN Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP
Snooping for the desired
VLAN.
Router Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP report message from the member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
Leave Time: Specify the interval between the switch receivin
g a leave message
from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast
groups.
Static Router Ports: Enter
the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
VLAN Table
VLAN ID Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding VLAN ID
based on the ID number you entered.
Select: Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Router Port Time: Displays the router port time of the VLAN.
Member Port Time: Displays the member port time of the VLAN.
117
Leave Time: Displays the leave time of the VLAN.
Router Port: Displays the router port of the VLAN.
Note:
The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled
Configuration procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Enable IGMP Snooping
function
Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch
and for the port on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.
2
Configure the multicast
parameters for VLANs
Optional. Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config page.
If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration, it
indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN,
thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted.
8.1.3 Port Config
On this page you can configure the IGMP feature for ports of the switch.
When the switch receives IGMP report message, it examines the multicast filtering IP ID
configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the multicast
IP is not filtered, the switch will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group.
Otherwise, the switch will drop the IGMP report message. In that way, you can control the
multicast groups that users can access.
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-7 Port Config
118
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configurati
on. It
is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port of the switch.
IGMP Snooping: Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port.
Fast Leave:
Select Enable/Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port. If
Fast Leave is enabled for a port, the switch
will immediately
remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IGMP
leave messages.
Filter: Select Enable/Disable multicast filtering feature on the port.
Action Mode:
Select the action mode to process multicast packets when the
multicast IP is in the filtering IP-range.
Permit: Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is in the
IP-range will be processed.
Deny: Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is not in
the IP-range will be processed.
Bound IP-Range
(ID):
Enter the IP-range ID the port will be bound to. T
he binding
IP-range ID
s of the port can be cleared by entering null value in
this field and click Apply button to submit the configuration.
Max Groups:
Specify the maximum number of multicast groups to prevent some
ports taking up too much bandwidth.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.
2. When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled, the
leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi-user will result in the other users
intermitting the multicast business.
3. Multicast Filter feature can only have effect on the VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled.
4. Multicast Filter feature has no effect on static multicast IP.
5. Up to 15 IP-Ranges can be bound to one port.
8.1.4 IP-Range
On this page you can figure the desired IP-ranges to be filtered.
119
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→IP-Range to load the following page.
Figure 8-8 Multicast Filter
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create IP-Range
IP Range ID: Enter the IP-range ID.
Start Multicast IP: Enter start multicast IP of the IP-range you set.
End Multicast IP: Enter end multicast IP of the IP-range you set.
IP-Range Table
IP-Range ID Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding IP-
range
ID based on the ID number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding
IP-range. It is multi-optional.
IP-Range ID: Displays IP-range ID.
Start Multicast IP: Displays start multicast IP of the IP-range.
End Multicast IP: Displays end multicast IP of the IP-range.
8.1.5 Multicast VLAN
In old multicast transmission mode, when users in different VLANs apply for join the same
multicast group, the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each
VLAN owning a receiver one copy. This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth.
The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN. By adding switch ports to the
multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping, you can make users in different VLANs share the
same multicast VLAN. This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only
within the multicast VLAN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated
from user VLANS.
Before configuring a multicast VLAN, you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and
add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802.1Q VLAN page. If the multicast VLAN is
120
enabled, the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid, that
is, the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN.
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN to load the following page.
Figure 8-9 Multicast VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Multicast VLAN
Multicast VLAN: Select Enable/Disable Multicast VLAN feature.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN.
Router Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP query message from the router port,
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.
Member Port Time:
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the
switch doesn’
t receive IGMP report message from the member
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.
Leave Time:
Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message
from a host, and the switch removing the host from the multicast
groups.
Router Ports: Enter
the static router port which is mainly used in the network
with stable topology.
Note:
1. The router port should be in the multicast VLAN, otherwise the member ports cannot receive
multicast streams.
2. The Multicast VLAN won't take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the
corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802.1Q VLAN page.
3. It is recommended to choose GENERAL as the link type of the member ports in the multicast
VLAN.
121
4. Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as TRUNK or configure the
egress rule as TAG and the link type as GENERAL otherwise all the member ports in the
multicast VLAN cannot receive multicast streams.
5. After a multicast VLAN is created, all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the
multicast VLAN.
Configuration procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Enable IGMP Snooping
function
Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch
and for the port on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.
2 Create a multicast VLAN Required. Create a multicast VLAN and add all the member
ports and router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN→802.1Q
VLAN page.
Configure the link type of the member ports as
GENERAL.
Configure the link type of the router ports as TRUNK or
configure the egress rule as tagged GENERAL.
3
Configure parameters for
multicast VLAN
Optional. Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.
It is recommended to keep the default time parameters.
4 Look over the configuration If it is successfully configured, the VLAN ID of the multicast
VLAN will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table
on the Multicast→IGMP Snooping→
Snooping Config
page.
Application Example for Multicast VLAN:
Network Requirements
Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router, and the streams are transmitted to user A
and user B through the switch.
Router: Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source; its LAN port is connected to the switch.
The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3.
Switch: Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3; port 4 is
connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4; port 5 is connected to user B and
the packets are transmitted in VLAN5.
User A: Connected to Port 4 of the switch.
User B: Connected to port 5 of the switch.
Configure a multicast VLAN, and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast
VLAN.
122
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Description
1 Create VLANs Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3, 4 and 5 respectively,
and specify the description of VLAN
3 as Multicast VLAN on
VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page.
2 Configure ports On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN function pages.
For port 3, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule
as TAG, and add it to VLAN3, VLAN4 and VLAN5.
For port 4, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule
as UNTAG, and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 4.
For port 5, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule
as UNTAG, and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 5.
3
Enable IGMP
Snooping function
Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config
page. Enable IGMP Snooping
function for port 3, port4 and port 5 on Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Port Config page.
4
Enable Multicast
VLAN
Enable Multicast VLAN, configure the VLAN ID of a multicast
VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.
5 Check Multicast VLAN 3-5 and Multicast VLAN 3
will be displayed in the IGMP
Snooping Status table on the Multicast→IGMP
Snooping→Snooping Config page.
8.1.6 Static Multicast IP
Static Multicast IP table, isolated from dynamic multicast group and multicast filter, is not learned
by IGMP Snooping. It can enhance the quality and security for information transmission in some
fixed multicast groups.
123
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Static Multicast IP to load the following page.
Figure 8-10 Static Multicast IP Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Static Multicast
Multicast IP: Enter static multicast IP address.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast IP.
Forward Port: Enter the forward port of the multicast group.
Search Option
Search Option:
Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired
entries quickly.
All: Displays all static multicast IP entries.
Mul
ticast IP: Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry
must carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.
Port: Enter the port number the desired entry must carry.
Static Multicast IP Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete
the corresponding static
multicast IP. It is multi-optional.
Multicast IP: Displays the multicast IP.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.
Forward Port: Displays the forward port of the multicast group.
8.1.7 Packet Statistics
On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch, which facilitates you
to monitor the IGMP messages in the network.
124
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 8-11 Packet Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Select Enable/Disable auto refresh feature.
Refresh Period:
Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh
period.
IGMP Statistics
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Query Packet: Displays the number of query packets the port received.
Report Packet (V1): Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the port received.
Report Packet (V2): Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the port received.
Report Packet (V3): Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port received.
Leave Packet: Displays the number of leave packets the port received.
Error Packet: Displays the number of error packets the port received.
125
8.2 MLD Snooping
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery（MLD）snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.
The switch, running MLD Snooping, listens to the MLD messages transmitted between the host
and the router, and tracks the MLD messages and the registered port. When receiving MLD report
message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to MLD
Done message from the host, the router sends the Multicast-Address-Specific Query message of
the port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the switch will receive MLD report
message; if no, the switch will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the
port from the multicast address table. The router regularly sends MLD query messages. After
receiving the MLD query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address
table if the switch receives no MLD report message from the host within a period of time.
MLD Snooping Fundamentals
1. MLD Messages
MLD Queries
：
MLD Queries include General Queries and Multicast-Address-Specific Queries
(MASQs) and are sent out from the MLD router.
MLD Reports
：
When a host wants to join a multicast group or responds to the MLD queries, it will
send out an MLD report.
MLD Done Messages
：
When a host wants to leave a multicast group, it will send out an MLD
Done message to inform the IPv6 multicast routers of its leave.
2. Relevant Ports of the Switch
Router Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the MLD router.
Member Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the multicast members.
3. Timers
Router Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD queries from the
router port, it will delete this port from the router port list. The default value is 260 seconds.
Member Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD reports from the
member port, it will delete this port from the MLD multicast group. The default value is 260
seconds.
General Query Interval: The interval between the multicast router sends out general queries.
Last Listener Query Interval: The interval between the switch sends out MASQs.
Last Listener Query Count: The number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging out a
multicast address when there is no MLD report response.
MLD Snooping Process
1. General Query
The MLD router regularly sends MLD general queries to query if the multicast groups contain any
members. When receiving MLD general queries, the switch will forward them to all other ports in
the VLAN. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a router port yet, it will
126
be added to the router port list with its router port aging time specified; if the receiving port is
already a router port, its router port aging time will be directly reset.
2. Membership Report
The host will send MLD report messages when it applies for joining a multicast group or responds
to the MLD query message from the router.
When receiving MLD report message, the switch will forward the report message via the router
port in the VLAN, and analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host
applies for joining. If the multicast group does not exist, it will create the group entry. The receiving
port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port, it will be added to the forward list
of the multicast group with its member port aging time specified; if the receiving port is already a
member port, its member port aging time will be directly reset.
3. Member Leave
The host will send MLD Done message when leaving a multicast group to inform the router of its
leaving.
When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN and a Done message is received on a port of
this VLAN, the switch will generate MASQs on this port to check if there are other members in this
multicast group. The user can control when a port membership is removed for an exiting address
in terms of the number and interval of MASQs. If there is no Report message received from this
port during the switch maximum response time, the port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted
from the multicast group. If the deleted port is the last member of the multicast group, the multicast
group is also deleted. The switch will send Done message to the router ports of the VLAN.
In IPv6，Layer 2 switches can use Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping to limit the
flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that IPv6 multicast
data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data. This list is constructed
by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.
The MLD Snooping function can be implemented on Global Config, VLAN Config, Filter Config,
Port Config, Static Multicast, Querier Config and Packet Statistics pages.
8.2.1 Global Config
To configure the MLD Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure MLD global configuration
and related parameters on this page.
127
Chose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-12 Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
MLD Snooping: Enable or disable MLD Snooping function globally.
Report Message
Suppression:
Enable or disable Report Message Suppression function globally.
If this function is enabled, the first Report Message from the
listener will forward to the router ports while the subsequent
Report Message from the group w
ill be suppressed to reduce the
MLD traffic in the network.
Unknown Multicast
Filter:
Choose to forward or drop unknown multicast data.
Unknown IPv6 multicast packets refer to those packets without
corresponding forwarding entries in the IPv6 multicast table:
When unknown multicast filter is enabled, the switch will discard
all received unknown IPv6 multicast packets;
When unknown multicast filer is disabled, all
unknown IPv6
multicast packets are flooded in the ingress VLAN.
Router Port Aging
Time:
Enter
the global router port aging time. If the router port does not
receive Query Message in the aging time, it will be aged.
Member Port Aging
Time:
Enter the global member port aging time. If the member port
does not receive Report Message in the aging time
, it will be
aged.
Last Listener Query
Interval:
Enter the Last Listener Query interval time. When the multicast
group has no more member ports, it will send the Specific Query
Message with this interval time to check whether there is
another
listener.
128
Last Listener Query
Count:
Enter the Last Listener Query numbers. When the multicast
group has no more member ports, it will send this numbers of
Specific Query Message to check whether there is
another
listener.
Multicast VLAN: Enable or disable multicast
VLAN function. When multicast
VLAN is enabled, all multicast data will forward in this VLAN if
this port belongs to the VLAN.
Multicast VLAN ID: Enter the multicast VLAN ID.
Note:
1. When Unknown Multicast Filter is configured, the Unknown Multicast function in IGMP
Snooping is also configured at the same time.
2. Configurations of the Router Port Aging Time and Member Port Aging Time in 8.2.2 VLAN
Config override their global configurations here.
3. Before creating a Multicast VLAN, you should enable the MLD snooping function in this VLAN
in 8.2.2 VLAN Config.
Configuration Procedure of Multicast VLAN:
Step Operation Description
1
Create VLAN. Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →VLAN Config
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,
specify its member ports.
2
Enable MLD Snooping
globally.
Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Global
Config page, enable the MLD Snooping function globally.
3
Enable MLD Snooping in the
VLAN.
Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →VLAN
Config page, specify the VLAN ID as the VLAN created in
step 1.
4
Enable the Multicast VLAN. Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Global
Config page, enable the Multicast VLAN function and
specify the Multicast VLAN ID as the VLAN specified in
Step 1.
8.2.2 VLAN Config
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single VLAN. You need to
create VLAN if you want to enable MLD Snooping function in this VLAN.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.
129
Figure 8-13 VLAN Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID you want to configure.
Router Port Aging
Time:
Enter the router port aging time for this VLAN. It will override the
global configured aging time.
Member Port Aging
Time:
Enter the member port aging time for this VLAN. It will override
the global configured aging time.
Immediate Leave: Enab
le or disable immediate leave function for this VLAN. If this
function is enabled, the multicast group member port will be
deleted immediately if Done Message receive, not sending
Specific Query for listener checking.
Static Router Ports: Enter the static
router ports for this VLAN. Static router ports will
not be aged.
VLAN Table
Select: Select the VLAN ID you want to change.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Router Port Aging
Time:
Displays the router port aging time of this VLAN.
Member Port Aging
Time:
Displays the member port aging time of this VLAN.
Immediate Leave: Displays the immediate leave function of this VLAN.
You should
only use the Immediate-Leave
feature when there is a single
receiver present on every port in the VLAN.
If the immediate
le
ave function is enabled on a port with several listeners in the
same IPv6 multicast group, these listeners will fail to receive the
IPv6 multicast packets after one of them leave this group.
Static Router Ports: Displays the static router ports of this VLAN.
130
Dynamic Router
Ports
：
Displays the dynamic router ports of this VLAN.
Note:
1. The MLD snooping function in a VLAN will take effect when global MLD Snooping function is
enabled in 8.2.1 Global Config and the VLAN is created in Chapter 6 VLAN.
2. When the router port aging time or member port aging time is set for a VLAN, this value
overrides the value configured globally in 8.2.1 Global Config.
8.2.3 Filter Config
When the switch receives MLD report messages, it examines the multicast filtering ID and filter
mode configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the port
can join the multicast group, the switch will add the port to the forward ports list of the multicast
group. Otherwise, the switch will drop the MLD report messages. In that way, you can control the
multicast groups that users can join in.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Filter Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-14 Filter Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Filter Config
Filter ID: Enter the Filter ID which identifies the filter.
Start Multicast IP: Enter the start of the IP range.
End Multicast IP: Enter the end of the IP range.
Filter List
Select: Select the filter ID you want to change.
Filter ID: Displays the filter ID number.
Start Multicast IP: Displays the start of the IP range.
End Multicast IP: Displays the end of the IP range.
Note:
The max number of filter entries is 30.
131
8.2.4 Port Config
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single port.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 8-15 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Select: Select the port you want to configure.
Port: Displays the port number.
Filter: Choose to enable or disable filter function in this port.
Filter Mode: Choose the filter action mode. You can accept or refuse Report
message with specific multicast groups specify by the filter IDs.
Filter IDs: Enter the filter IDs with this port. The filter IDs are configured in
Filer Config. The format is 1,4,12.
The max number of filter entries on each port is 15.
Max Groups:
Enter the maximum groups which the port can join as the
member port. It ranges from 0 to 256.
LAG: Displays the LAG number.
Note:
If the Max Groups value is set less than the current value, some groups may be deleted to satisfy
the restriction.
8.2.5 Static Multicast
On this page you can configure static multicast groups. The multicast groups configured here are
not learned by MLD Snooping and independent of dynamic multicast groups and multicast filters.
The static multicast member ports won’t age out.
132
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Static Multicast to load the following page.
Figure 8-16 Static Multicast
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Static Multicast Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID.
Multicast IP: Enter the multicast IP address.
Member Ports: Enter the member ports of the static multicast group.
Static Multicast List
Select: Select the static multicast group you want to change.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Multicast IP: Displays the multicast group IP address.
Member Ports: Displays the member ports of the static multicast group.
8.2.6 Querier Config
In an IPv6 multicast network that runs MLD, a Layer 3 multicast device works as an MLD querier to
send out MLD queries and manage the multicast table. But MLD is not supported by the devices in
Layer 2 network. MLD Snooping Querier can act as an MLD Router in Layer 2 network. It can help
to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it
generates.
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Querier Config to load the following page.
133
Figure 8-17 Querier Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Querier Config
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID which you want to start Querier.
Maximum Response
Time:
Enter the value of Maximum Response Time field of the Query
message.
Query Interval: Enter the Query message interval time. The Querier will send
General Query Message with this interval.
Query Source IP: Enter the Query Message source IP address.
It is
FE80::02FF:FFFF:FE00:0001 by default.
Querier List
Select: Select the Querier you want to change.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Maximum Response
Time:
Displays the value of Maximum Response Time field of the
Query message.
Query Interval: Displays the Query message interval time.
Query Source IP: Displays the Query message source IP address.
Note:
The MLD Snooping Querier doesn’t participate in the MLD Querier Election, but an MLD Snooping
Querier will affect the MLD Querier Election in the IPv6 network running MLD because of its
relatively smaller IP address.
8.2.7 Packet Statistics
On this page you can view the MLD packets the switch received. It helps you to monitor the MLD
Snooping function.
134
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.
Figure 8-18 Packet Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Fresh
Auto Fresh: Select Enable/Disable auto fresh feature.
Fresh Period: Enter the time from 3 to 300 seconds to specify the auto fresh
period.
MLD Packet Statistics
Received MLD
Query :
Displays the number of MLD Query packets the switch has
received.
Received MLDv1
Report:
Displays the number of MLDv1 Report packets which the switch
has received.
Received MLDv2
Report:
Displays the number of MLDv2 Report packets which the switch
has received.
Received MLD Done: Displays the number of MLD Done packets which the switch has
received.
Send MLD
Spec-Query:
Displays the number of MLD Specific Query packets which the
switch has sent.
135
Error Packet:
Displays the number of error packets which the switch has
received.
8.3 Multicast Table
In a network, receivers can join different multicast groups appropriate to their needs. The switch
forwards multicast streams based on IPv4/IPv6 multicast address table.
The Multicast Table function is implemented on the IPv4 Multicast Table and IPv6 Multicast
Table pages.
8.3.1 IPv4 Multicast Table
On this page you can view the information of the multicast groups already on the switch. Multicast
IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The range for receivers to join is from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv4 Multicast Table to load the following page.
Figure 8-19 IPv4 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Multicast IP: Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.
Port: Select the port number the desired entry must carry.
Type: Select the type the desired entry must carry.
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.
Static: Displays all static multicast IP entries.
Dynamic: Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP Table
Multicast IP: Displays multicast IP address.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.
136
Forward Port: Displays the forward port of the multicast group.
Type: Displays the type of the multicast IP.
8.3.2 IPv6 Multicast Table
This page displays the multicast groups which already on the switch.
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv6 Multicast Table to load the following page.
Figure 8-20 IPv6 Multicast Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Multicast IP: Enter the multica
st IP address the desired entry must
carry.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.
Port: Select the port number the desired entry must carry.
Type: Select the type the desired entry must carry.
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.
Static: Displays all static multicast IP entries.
Dynamic: Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries.
Multicast IP Table
Multicast IP: Displays the multicast IP.
VLAN ID: Displays the VLAN ID.
Forward Ports: Displays the forward ports of the group.
Type: Displays the type of the group.
Note:
The max number of multicast entries is 256. The IPv4 multicast table and IPv6 multicast table
share the total entry number of 256.
Return to CONTENTS
137
Chapter 9 QoS
QoS (Quality of Service) functions to provide different quality of service for various network
applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a
network service experience of a better quality.
QoS
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.
Figure 9-1 QoS function
Traffic classification: Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain
rules.
Map: The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority
modes. This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP.
Queue scheduling algorithm: When the network is congested, the problem that many packets
compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch
supports four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.
Priority Mode
This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP. By default, the
priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional.
1. Port Priority
Port priority is just a property of the port. After port priority is configured, the data stream will be
mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship
between CoS and queues.
138
2. 802.1P Priority
Figure 9-2 802.1Q frame
As shown in the figure above, each 802.1Q Tag has a Pri field, comprising 3 bits. The 3-bit priority
field is 802.1p priority in the range of 0 to 7. 802.1P priority determines the priority of the packets
based on the Pri value. On the Web management page of the switch, you can configure different
priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels, and then the switch determine which
packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets. The switch processes untagged packets
based on the default priority mode.
3. DSCP Priority
Figure 9-3 IP datagram
As shown in the figure above, the ToS (Type of Service) in an IP header contains 8 bits. The first
three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7. RFC2474 re-defines the ToS field in the IP
packet header, which is called the DS field. The first six bits (bit 0-bit 5) of the DS field indicate
DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63. The last 2 bits (bit 6 and bit 7) are reserved. On the Web
management page, you can configure different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority
levels. Non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P
priority mode; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode.
Schedule Mode
When the network is congested, the problem that many packets compete for resources must be
solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch implements four scheduling queues,
TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3. TC0 has the lowest priority while TC3 has the highest priority. The switch
provides four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.
1. SP-Mode: Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will occupy the
whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with
higher priority is empty. The switch has four egress queues labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 and
TC3. In SP mode, their priorities increase in order. TC3 has the highest priority. The
disadvantage of SP queue is that: if there are packets in the queues with higher priority for a
long time in congestion, the packets in the queues with lower priority will be “starved to death”
because they are not served.
139
Figure 9-4 SP-Mode
2. WRR-Mode: Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues are sent in
order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain
service time. The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource. WRR queue
overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority
cannot get service for a long time. In WRR mode, though the queues are scheduled in order,
the service time for each queue is not fixed, that is to say, if a queue is empty, the next queue
will be scheduled. In this way, the bandwidth resources are made full use of. The default
weight value ratio of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 is 1:2:4:8.
Figure 9-5 WRR-Mode
3. SP+WRR-Mode: Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, this switch
provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. Queues in SP group and WRR
group are scheduled strictly based on strict-priority mode while the queues inside WRR group
follow the WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC3 is in the SP group; TC0, TC1 and TC2 belong
to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TC0, TC1 and TC2 is 1:2:4. In this way, when
scheduling queues, the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP
mode and the TC0, TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to
their ratio 1:2:4.
4. Equ-Mode: Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally. The
weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1.
140
The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration, including three submenus:
DiffServ, Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN.
9.1 DiffServ
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.
This switch implements three priority modes basing on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP, and supports
four queue scheduling algorithms. The port priorities are labeled as CoS0, CoS1… CoS7.
The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority, DSCP Priority, 802.1P/CoS
mapping and Schedule Mode pages.
9.1.1 Port Priority
On this page you can configure the port priority.
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →Port Priority to load the following page.
Figure 9-6 Port Priority Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Priority Config
Select: Select the desired port to configure its priority. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the physical port number of the switch.
Priority: Specify the priority for the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
141
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1 Select the port priority Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Port Priority page,
configure the port priority.
2
Configure the mapping
relation between the CoS
priority and TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P/CoS mapping
page, configure the mapping relation between the CoS
and TC.
3 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode
page, select a schedule mode.
9.1.2 DSCP Priority
On this page you can configure DSCP priority. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP
ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP
Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority
mode; non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P
priority mode if 8021.1P Priority mode is enabled; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based
on port priority mode.
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →DSCP Priority to load the following page.
Figure 9-7 DSCP Priority
142
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DSCP Priority Config
DSCP Priority: Select Enable or Disable DSCP Priority.
Priority Level
DSCP:
Indicates the priority determined by the DS region of IP datagram.
It ranges from 0 to 63.
Priority: Indicates the 802.1P
priority the packets with tag are mapped to.
The priorities are labeled as CoS0 ~ CoS7.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the mapping
relation between the DSCP
priority and 802.1P priority
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→DSCP Priority page,
enable DSCP Priority and configure
the mapping
relation between the DSCP priority and CoS.
2
Configure the mapping
relation between the CoS and
the TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P/CoS mapping
page, configure the mapping relation between the CoS
and the TC.
3 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode
page, select a schedule mode.
9.1.3 802.1P/CoS mapping
On this page you can configure the mapping relation between the 802.1P priority tag-id/CoS-id and
the TC-id.
802.1P gives the Pri field in 802.1Q tag a recommended definition. This field, ranging from 0-7, is
used to divide packets into 8 priorities. 802.1P Priority is enabled by default, so the packets with
802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority mode but the untagged
packets are mapped based on port priority mode. With the same value, the 802.1P priority tag and
the CoS will be mapped to the same TC.
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →802.1P/CoS mapping to load the following page.
Figure 9-8 802.1P/CoS mapping
143
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Priority and CoS-mapping Config
Tag-id/Cos-id: Indicates the prece
dence level defined by IEEE802.1P and the
CoS ID.
Queue TC-id:
Indicates the priority level of egress queue the packets with tag
and CoS-
id are mapped to. The priority levels of egress queue are
labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the mapping
relation between the 802.1P
priority Tag/CoS and the TC
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→
802.1P/CoS mapping
page, configure
the mapping relation between the
802.1P priority Tag/CoS and the TC.
2 Select a schedule mode Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode page,
select a schedule mode.
9.1.4 Schedule Mode
On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch. When the network is congested, the
problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue
scheduling. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0,
TC1… TC3.
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →Schedule Mode to load the following page.
Figure 9-9 Schedule Mode
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Schedule Mode Config
SP-Mode: Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue
with higher priority will
occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower
priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty.
WRR-Mode:
Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues
are sent in order based
on the weight value for each queue. The
weight value ratio of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 is 1:2:4:8.
144
SP+WRR-Mode: Strict-
Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, this
switch provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group.
Queues in SP group an
d WRR group are scheduled strictly based
on strict-
priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow
the WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC3 is in the SP group; TC0,
TC1 and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio
of TC0, TC1 and TC2 is 1:2:4
. In this way, when scheduling
queues, the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth
following the SP mode and the TC0, TC1 and TC2 in the WRR
group will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio 1:2:4.
Equ-Mode: Equal-Mode. In this mode, all t
he queues occupy the bandwidth
equally. The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1.
9.2 Bandwidth Control
Bandwidth function, allowing you to control the traffic rate and broadcast flow on each port to
ensure network in working order, can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages.
9.2.1 Rate Limit
Rate limit functions to control the ingress/egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the
available bandwidth of each port. In this way, the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed
and utilized.
Choose the menu QoS →Bandwidth Control →Rate Limit to load the following page.
Figure 9-10 Rate Limit
145
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Rate Limit Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port for Rate configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Ingress Rate (bps): Configure the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port.
You can
select a rate from the dropdown list or
select "Manual" to set
Ingress rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple
of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress
rate.
Egress Rate(bps): Configure the bandwidth for sending packets on the port.
You can
select a rate from the dropdown list or
select "Manual" to set
Egress rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple
of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entere
d as the real Egress
rate.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
1. If you enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control-enabled port, storm control feature
will be disabled for this port.
2. When selecting "Manual" to set Ingress/Egress rate, the system will automatically select
integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress/Egress rate.
For example, if you enter 1000Kbps for egress rate, the system will automatically select
1024Kbps as the real Egress rate.
3. When egress rate limit feature is enabled for one or more ports, you are suggested to disable
the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally.
9.2.2 Storm Control
Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.
If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth, the packets will be
automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm.
146
Choose the menu QoS →Bandwidth Control →Storm Control to load the following page.
Figure 9-11 Storm Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Storm Control Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port for Storm Control configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Broadcast Rate
(bps):
Select the bandwidth for receiving broadcast packets on the port.
T
he packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded.
Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.
Multicast Rate
(bps):
Select the bandwidth for receiving multicast packets on the port.
The packet traffic exceeding the bandwi
dth will be discarded.
Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.
UL-Frame Rate
(bps):
Select the bandwidth for receiving UL-
Frame on the port. The
packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded. Select
Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
Note:
If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit-enabled port, ingress rate limit feature
will be disabled for this port.
147
9.3 Voice VLAN
Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related
configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice
quality.
OUI Address (Organizationally unique identifier address)
The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC
address. If the source MAC address of packet complies with the OUI addresses configured by the
system, the packet is determined as voice packets and transmitted in voice VLAN.
An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers) to a device vendor. It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address. You can recognize
which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address. The following table shows the
OUI addresses of several manufacturers. The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by
default.
Number
OUI Address Vendor
1 00-01-E3-00-00-00 Siemens phone
2 00-03-6B-00-00-00 Cisco phone
3 00-04-0D-00-00-00 Avaya phone
4 00-60-B9-00-00-00 Philips/NEC phone
5 00-D0-1E-00-00-00 Pingtel phone
6 00-E0-75-00-00-00 Polycom phone
7 00-E0-BB-00-00-00 3com phone
Table 9-1 OUI addresses on the switch
Port Voice VLAN Mode
A voice VLAN can operate in two modes: automatic mode and manual mode.
Automatic Mode: In this mode, the switch will automatically add a port which receives voice
packets to voice VLAN and determine the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC
of the UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on. The aging time of voice VLAN
can be configured on the switch. If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress
port within the aging time, the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN. Voice ports are
automatically added into or removed from voice VLAN.
Manual Mode: You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN, and then the switch
will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC
address of packets and matching OUI address.
In practice, the port voice VLAN mode is configured according to the type of packets sent out from
voice device and the link type of the port. The following table shows the detailed information.
148
Port Voice VLAN
Mode
Voice
Stream Type Link type of the port and processing mode
Automatic Mode
TAG voice
stream
ACCESS: Not supported.
TRUNK: Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot
be
voice VLAN.
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the
voice VLAN should be TAG.
UNTAG voice
stream
ACCESS: Supported.
TRUNK: Not supported.
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port should
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the
voice VLAN should be UNTAG.
Manual Mode
TAG voice
stream
ACCESS: Not supported.
TRUNK：Supported. The default VLAN of the port should
not
be voice VLAN.
GENERAL：Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the
voice VLAN should be TAG.
UNTAG voice
stream
ACCESS: Supported.
TRUNK: Not supported.
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port should
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the
voice VLAN should be UNTAG.
Table 9-2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode
Security Mode of Voice VLAN
When voice VLAN is enabled for a port, you can configure its security mode to filter data stream. If
security mode is enabled, the port just forwards voice packets, and discards other packets whose
source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses. If security mode is not enabled, the port
forwards all the packets.
Security
Mode
Packet Type Processing Mode
Enable
UNTAG packet
When the source MAC address of the packet is the OUI address
that can be iden
tified, the packet can be transmitted in the voice
VLAN. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.
Packet with voice
VLAN TAG
Packet with other
VLAN TAG
The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is
determined by whether the port per
mits the VLAN or not,
independent of voice VLAN security mode.
Disable
UNTAG packet
Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all the
packets can be transmitted in the voice VLAN.
Packet with voice
VLAN TAG
Packet with other
VLAN TAG
The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is
determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not,
independent of voice VLAN security mode.
Table 9-3 Security mode and packets processing mode
149
Note:
Do not transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for
some special requirements.
The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config, Port Config and OUI Config
pages.
9.3.1 Global Config
On this page, you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN, including VLAN ID,
aging time, the transmission priority of the voice packets and so on.
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN →Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-12 Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Voice VLAN: Select Enable/Disable Voice VLAN function.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN.
Aging Time:
Specifies the living time of the member port in auto mode after the
OUI address is aging out.
Priority: Select the priority of the port when sending voice data. T
he default
priority is 6.
9.3.2 Port Config
Before the voice VLAN function is enabled, the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should
be configured on this page.
150
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN →Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-13 Port Config
Note:
1. To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port, please ensure its member state
accords with its port mode.
2. If a port is a member port of voice VLAN, changing its port mode to be “Auto” will make the
port leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice
streams.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration. It is
multi-optional.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Port Mode: Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN.
Auto: In this mode, the switch automatically adds a port to the
voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLAN by
checking whether the port receives voice data or not
Manual: In this mode, you can manu
ally add a port to the
voice VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN.
151
Security Mode: Configure the security mode for forwarding packets.
Disable: All packets are forwarded.
Enable: Only voice data are forwarded.
Member State: Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN.
LAG: Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.
9.3.3 OUI Config
The switch supports OUI creation and adds the MAC address of the special voice device to the
OUI table of the switch. The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by
checking its OUI address. The switch analyzes the received packets. If the packets are recognized
as voice packets, the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN.
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN→OUI Config to load the following page.
Figure 9-14 OUI Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create OUI
OUI: Enter the OUI address of the voice device.
Mask: Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device.
Description: Give a description to the OUI for identification.
OUI Table
Select: Select the desired entry to view the detailed information.
OUI: Displays the OUI address of the voice device.
Mask: Displays the OUI address mask of the voice device.
152
Description: Displays the description of the OUI.
Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure the link
type of the port
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page,
configure the link type of ports of the voice device.
2
Create VLAN Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page
, click
the Create button to create a VLAN.
3
Add OUI address
Optional. On QoS→Voice VLAN→OUI Config page,
you can
check whether the switch is supporting the OUI template or not. If
not, please add the OUI address.
4
Configure the
parameters of the
ports in voice VLAN.
Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Port Config page, configure
the parameters of the ports in voice VLAN.
5
Enable Voice VLAN Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Global Config page,
configure the global parameters of voice VLAN.
Return to CONTENTS
153
Chapter 10 PoE
Note:
Only TL-SG3424P supports PoE function.
PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with
data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is especially
useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras and so on.
Composition
A PoE system usually consists of PSE and PD.
PSE: Power sourcing equipment (PSE) is a device such as a switch that provides power on the
Ethernet cable to the linked device.
PD: A powered device (PD) is a device accepting power from the PSE and thus consumes energy.
PDs falls into two types, standard PDs and nonstandard PDs. Standard PDs refer to the powered
devices that comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. Examples include wireless LAN access
points, IP Phones, IP cameras, network hubs, embedded computers etc.
Advantage
Cheap cabling: The remote device such as cameras can be powered by PSE in no need
of prolonging its power cord additionally and Ethernet cable is much cheaper than AC
wire or power cord.
Easy to connect: PoE uses only one Ethernet cable with no need of external power
supply.
Reliable: A powered device can be either powered by PSE using Ethernet cable or
powered through the provided power adapter. It is very convenient to provide a backup
power supply for the PDs.
Flexibility: In compliance with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at, global organizations can
deploy PoE everywhere without concern for any local variance in AC power standards,
outlets, plugs, or reliability.
Wide use: It can be applied to wireless LAN access points, IP Phones, IP cameras,
network hubs, embedded computers etc.
TL-SG3424P is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE). All the Auto-Negotiation RJ45 ports on the
switch support Power over Ethernet (PoE) function, which can automatically detect and supply
power for those powered devices (PDs) complying with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. The
maximum power TL-SG3424P can supply is 320W and the maximum power each PoE port can
supply is 30W.
PoE function can be configured in the two sections, PoE Config and PoE Time-Range.
10.1 PoE Config
All the RJ45 ports on the switch can be configured to supply power for the powered devices that
comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. As the power every port or the system can provide is
limited, some attributes should be set to make full use of the power and guarantee the adequate
power to the linked PDs. When the power exceeds the maximum power limit or the power is
inadequate to power the device, the switch may disconnect the power supply to the PD linked to
the port with lower priority. When detecting a PD is unplugged, the switch will stop supplying the
power to the PD.
154
PoE Config, mainly for PoE attributes configuration, is implemented on PoE Config and PoE
Time-Range ages.
10.1.1 PoE Config
On this page, you can configure the parameters to implement PoE function.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→PoE Config to load the following page.
Figure 10-1 PoE Config
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
System Power Limit: Specify the max power the PoE switch can supply.
Power Disconnect
Method:
When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PoE
s
witch guarantees the power supply with the following two
methods:
Deny Next Port:
When the supply power exceeds the system
power limit, the newly-connected PD will be disconnected.
Deny Lower Priority: When the supply power exceeds the
system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower
priority will be disconnected.
System Power
Consumption:
Displays the PoE switch's real time system power consumption.
Syste
m Power
Remain:
Displays the PoE switch's real time remaining system power.
Port Config
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry
based on the port number you entered.
Select: Select the desired port to configure its parameters.
155
Port: Displays the port number.
PoE Status:
Select to disable/enable the PoE feature for the corresponding
port. If set enable, the corresponding port can supply power to the
linked PD (Powered Device).
PoE Priority: The priority levels includ
e High, Middle and Low in descending
order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit,
the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected.
Power Limit
(0.1w-30w):
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1
represents 4w, Class2 represents 7w, Class3 represents 15.4w
and Class4 represents 30w.
Time Range: Select the time range for the PoE port to supply power. If
No limit
is selected, the PoE port will supply power all the time.
PoE Profile: Select the profile
you want to apply to the selected port. If a PoE
Profile is selected, the three attributes including PoE Status, PoE
Priority and Power Limit are not available.
Power (W): Displays the port's real time power supply.
Current (mA): Displays the port's real time current.
Voltage (V): Displays the port's real time voltage.
PD Class: Displays the class the linked PD (Powered Device) belongs to.
Power Status: Displays the port's real time power status.
10.1.2 PoE Profile
PoE (Power over Ethernet) Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. You can
create some profiles to be applied to the ports. In a profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and Power
limit are configured.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→Profile Profile to load the following page.
Figure 10-2 Profile Config
156
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Create PoE Profile
Profile Name: Enter the name of the profile.
PoE Status: Select to the enable/disable PoE feature for the co
rresponding
port. If set enable, the port may supply power to the linked PD
(Power Device).
PoE Priority:
The priority levels include High, Middle and Low in descending
order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit,
the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected.
Power Limit:
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1
represents 4w, Class2 represents 7w, Class3 represents 15.4w,
and Class4 represents 30w.
PoE Profile
Select: Select the desired profile to delete.
Profile Name: Displays the name of the profile.
PoE Status: Displays the PoE status of the port in the profile.
PoE Priority: Displays the PoE priority of the port in the profile.
Power Limit: Displays the max power the port in the profile can supply.
10.2 PoE Time-Range
A time-range based PoE enables you to implement PoE power supply by differentiating the
time-ranges. A time-range can be specified for each port. The port will not supply power when the
specified time-range is configured and the system time is not within the time-range.
On this switch absolute time, week time and holiday can be configured. Configure an absolute time
section in the form of “the start date to the end date” to make the port based on this time range
supply power; configure a week time section to make the port supply based on this time range on
the fixed days of the week; configure a holiday section and select Exclude Holiday to make the port
based on this time range not supply power on some special days. In each time-range, four
time-slices can be configured.
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on PoE Time-Range Summary, PoE
Time-Range Create and PoE Holiday Config pages.
10.2.1 Time-Range Summary
On this page you can view or delete the current time-ranges.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Time-Range Summary to load the following
page.
Figure 10-3 Time-Range Table
157
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Time-Range Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.
Index: Displays the index of the time-range.
Time-Range Name: Displays the name of the time-range.
Slice: Displays the time-slice of the time-range.
Mode: Displays the mode the time-range adopts.
Operation: Click Edit to modify this time-range and click Detail
to display the
complete information of this time–range.
10.2.2 PoE Time-Range Create
On this page you can create time-ranges.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Time-Range Create to load the following page.
Figure 10-4 Time-Range Create
Note:
To successfully configure time-ranges, please firstly specify time-slices and then time-ranges.
The following items are displayed on this screen:
Create Time-Range
Name: Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.
Exclude Holiday: Select Exclude Holiday, and the port based on this time-
range
may not supply power when the system time is within the holiday
Absolute: Select Absolute to configure absolute time-range. T
he port based
on this time-range will supply power based on this time-
range
when the system time is within the absolute time-range.
158
Week: Select Week to configure week time-range. T
he port based on this
time-range will supply power based on this time-
range when the
system time is within the week time-range.
Create Time-Slice
Start Time: Set the start time of the time-slice.
End Time: Set the end time of the time-slice.
Time-Slice Table
Index: Displays the index of the time-slice.
Start Time: Displays the start time of the time-slice.
End Time: Displays the end time of the time-slice.
Delete: Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time-slice.
10.2.3 PoE Holiday Config
Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode. On this
page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement.
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Holiday Create to load the following page.
Figure 10-5 Holiday Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Holiday
Start Date: Specify the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Specify the end date of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Enter the name of the holiday.
Holiday Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.
Index: Displays the index of the holiday.
159
Chapter 11 ACL
ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies
of packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network. Besides, ACL functions
to control traffic flows and save network resources. It provides a flexible and secured access
control policy and facilitates you to control the network security.
On this switch, ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be L2-L4
protocol key fields carried in the packets. A time-range based ACL enables you to implement ACL
control over packets by differentiating the time-ranges.
The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch, including four submenus:
Time-Range, ACL Config, Policy Config and Policy Binding.
11.1 Time-Range
If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time-range, a time-range should be
firstly specified in the ACL. As the time-range based ACL takes effect only within the specified
time-range, data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time-ranges.
On this switch absolute time, week time and holiday can be configured. Configure an absolute time
section in the form of “the start date to the end date” to make ACLs effective; configure a week time
section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week; configure a holiday section to make
ACLs effective on some special days. In each time-range, four time-slices can be configured.
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on Time-Range Summary, Time-Range
Create and Holiday Config pages.
11.1.1 Time-Range Summary
On this page you can view the current time-ranges.
Choose the menu ACL → Time-Range → Time-Range Summary to load the following page.
Figure 11-1 Time-Range Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Time-Range Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.
Index: Displays the index of the time-range.
Time-Range Name: Displays the name of the time-range.
Slice: Displays the time-slice of the time-range.
Mode: Displays the mode the time-range adopts.
Detail: Click the Detail
button to display the complete information of this
time–range.
161
11.1.2 Time-Range Create
On this page you can create time-ranges.
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Time-Range Create to load the following page.
Figure 11-2 Time-Range Create
Note:
To successfully configure time-ranges, please firstly specify time-slices and then time-ranges.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Time-Range
Name: Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.
Holiday: Select Holiday you set as a time-range.
The ACL rule based on this
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday.
Absolute: Select Absolute to configure absolute time-range.
The ACL rule based
on this time-
range takes effect only when the system time is within the
absolute time-range.
Week: Select Week to configure week time-range. The ACL rule based on thi
s
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the
week
time-range.
Create Time-Slice
Start Time: Set the start time of the time-slice.
End Time: Set the end time of the time-slice.
Time-Slice Table
Index: Displays the index of the time-slice.
Start Time: Displays the start time of the time-slice.
162
End Time: Displays the end time of the time-slice.
Delete: Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time-slice.
11.1.3 Holiday Config
Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode. On this
page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement.
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Holiday Config to load the following page.
Figure 11-3 Holiday Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Holiday
Start Date: Specify the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Specify the end date of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Enter the name of the holiday.
Holiday Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.
Index: Displays the index of the holiday.
Holiday Name: Displays the name of the holiday.
Start Date: Displays the start date of the holiday.
End Date: Displays the end date of the holiday.
11.2 ACL Config
An ACL may contain a number of rules, and each rule specifies a different package range. Packets
are matched in match order. Once a rule is matched, the switch processes the matched packets
taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rules, which can enhance
the performance of the switch.
The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary, ACL Create, MAC ACL,
Standard-IP ACL and Extend-IP ACL pages.
163
11.2.1 ACL Summary
On this page, you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Summary to load the following page.
Figure 11-4 ACL Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Select ACL: Select the ACL you have created
ACL Type: Displays the type of the ACL you select.
Rule Order: Displays the rule order of the ACL you select.
Rule Table
Here you can view the information about the ACL rule you select.
11.2.2 ACL Create
On this page you can create ACLs.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create to load the following page.
Figure 11-5 ACL Create
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create ACL
ACL ID: Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create.
Rule Order: User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL.
164
11.2.3 MAC ACL
MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the
source MAC addresses, destination MAC addresses, VLAN ID, and EtherType carried in the
packets.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL to load the following page.
Figure11-6 Create MAC Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create MAC ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
S-MAC: Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule.
D-MAC: Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule.
MASK:
Enter MAC address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID contained in the rule.
EtherType: Enter EtherType contained in the rule.
User Priority: Select the user priority contai
ned in the rule for the tagged packets to
match.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
165
11.2.4 Standard-IP ACL
Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which
can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets.
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL to load the following page.
Figure11-7 Create Standard-IP Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Standard-IP ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation:
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
S-IP: Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.
D-IP: Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.
Mask:
Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
11.2.5 Extend-IP ACL
Extend-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which
can be the source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, IP protocol and other information of this
sort carried in the packets.
166
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Extend-IP ACL to load the following page.
Figure11-8 Create Extend-IP Rule
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Extend-IP ACL
ACL ID: Select the desired Extend-IP ACL for configuration.
Rule ID: Enter the rule ID.
Operation: Select t
he operation for the switch to process packets which match the
rules.
Permit: Forward packets.
Deny: Discard Packets.
S-IP: Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.
D-IP: Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.
Mask: Enter IP a
ddress mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the
address.
IP Protocol: Select IP protocol contained in the rule.
TCP Flag
：
Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull-
down list of IP
Protocol.
S-Port:
Configure TCP/IP source port contained in the rule when TCP/UDP is
selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.
D-Port: Configure TCP/IP destination por
t contained in the rule when
TCP/UDP is selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.
DSCP: Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule.
IP ToS: Enter the IP-ToS contained in the rule.
167
IP Pre: Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule.
Time-Range: Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.
11.3 Policy Config
A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by
configuring ACLs and actions together for effect. The operations here include stream mirror,
stream condition, QoS remarking and redirect.
The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary, Police Create and Action Create
pages.
11.3.1 Policy Summary
On this page, you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Summary to load the following page.
Figure 11-9 Policy Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Select Policy: Select name of the desired policy for view.
If you want to delete the
desired policy, please click the Delete button.
Action Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy.
Index: Enter the index of the policy.
ACL ID: Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy.
S-Mirror: Displays the source mirror port of the policy.
S-Condition: Displays the source condition added to the policy.
Redirect: Displays the redirect added to the policy.
QoS Remark: Displays the QoS remark added to the policy.
11.3.2 Policy Create
On this page you can create the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create to load the following page.
168
Figure 11-10 Create Policy
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Policy
Policy Name: Enter the name of the policy.
11.3.3 Action Create
On this page you can add ACLs and create corresponding actions for the policy.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Action Create to load the following page.
Figure 11-11 Action Create
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Action
Select Policy: Select the name of the policy.
Select ACL: Select the ACL for configuration in the policy.
S-Mirror: Select S-Mirror to mirror the data packets in the
policy to the specific
port.
169
S-Condition: Select S-
Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in
the policy.
Rate: Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL.
Out of Band: Specify the disposal way
of the data packets those
are transmitted beyond the rate.
Redirect:
Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets
in the policy.
Destination Port: Forward the data packets those match the
corresponding ACL to the specific port.
QoS Remark:
Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS
settings.
DSCP: Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL.
Local Priority: Specify the local priority for the data packets those
match the corresponding ACL.
11.4 Policy Binding
Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port/VLAN. The policy will
take effect only when it is bound to a port/VLAN. In the same way, the port/VLAN will receive the
data packets and process them based on the policy only when the policy is bound to the
port/VLAN.
The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table, Port Binding and VLAN Binding
pages.
11.4.1 Binding Table
On this page view the policy bound to port/VLAN.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→Binding Table to load the following page.
Figure 11-12 Binding Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Show Mode: Select a show mode appropriate to your needs.
Policy Bind Table
Select: Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy.
170
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
Interface: Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
11.4.2 Port Binding
On this page you can bind a policy to a port.
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding to load the following page.
Figure 11-13 Bind the policy to the port
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port-Bind Config
Policy Name: Select the name of the policy you want to bind.
Port: Enter the number of the port you want to bind.
Port-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
Port: Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
11.4.3 VLAN Binding
On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN.
171
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→VLAN Binding to load the following page.
Figure11-14 Bind the policy to the VLAN
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
VLAN-Bind Config
Policy Name: Select the name of the policy you want to bind.
VLAN ID: Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind.
VLAN-Bind Table
Index: Displays the index of the binding policy.
Policy Name: Displays the name of the binding policy.
VLAN ID: Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy.
Direction: Displays the binding direction.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Configure effective
time-range
Required. On ACL→Time-Range
configuration pages,
configure the effective time-ranges for ACLs.
2
Configure ACL rules Required. On ACL→ACL Config
configuration pages,
configure ACL rules to match packets.
3
Configure Policy Required. On ACL→Policy Config configuration pages,
configure the policy to control the data packets those match
the corresponding ACL rules.
4
Bind the policy to the
port/VLAN
Required. On ACL→Policy Binding
configuration pages,
bind the policy to the port/VLAN to make the policy effective
on the corresponding port/VLAN.
11.5 Application Example for ACL
Network Requirements
1. The manager of the R&D department can access to the forum of the company and the Internet
without any forbiddance. The MAC address of the manager is 00-64-A5-5D-12-C3.
2. The staff of the R&D department cannot access to the Internet during the working time but can
visit the forum all day.
172
3. The staff of the marketing department can access to the Internet all day but cannot visit the
forum during the working time.
4. The R&D department and marketing department cannot communicate with each other.
Network Diagram
Configuration Procedure
Step Operation Description
1 Configure
Time-range
On ACL→Time-Range page, create a time-range named work_time.
Select Week mode and configure the week time from Monday to Friday.
Add a time-slice 08:00~18:00.
2
Configure for
requirement 1
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 11.
On ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL page, select ACL 11, create Rule 1,
configure the operation as Permit, configure the S-
MAC as
00-64-A5-5D-12-C3 and mask as FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-
FF, and configure
the time-range as No Limit.
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named
manager.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create
page, add ACL 11 to Policy
manager.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy manager
to bind to port 3.
173
Step Operation Description
3
Configure for
requirement 2
and 4
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 100.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL
page, select ACL 100,
create Rule 1, configure operation as Deny, configure S-I
P as
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.50.1
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as No Limit.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL
page, select ACL 100,
create Rule 2, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.255, configure the time-range as No Limit.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL
page, select ACL 100,
create Rule 3, configure operation as Permit, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as work_time.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 100 to Policy
limit1.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy limit1 to
bind to port 3.
4
Configure for
requirement 3
and 4
On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 101.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL
page, select ACL 101,
create Rule 4, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.50.1
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as No Limit.
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL pag
e, select ACL 101,
create Rule 5, configure operation as Deny, configure S-
IP as
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5
and mask as 255.255.255.255, configure the time-range as No Limit.
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named
limit2.
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 101 to Policy
limit1.
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy limit2 to
bind to port 4.
Return to CONTENTS
174
Chapter 12 Network Security
Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security,
including four submenus: IP-MAC Binding, ARP Inspection, DoS Defend and 802.1X. Please
configure the functions appropriate to your need.
12.1 IP-MAC Binding
The IP-MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the
connected Port number of the Host together. Based on the IP-MAC binding table and ARP
Inspection functions, you can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching the
bound entries to access the network.
The following three IP-MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch.
（1） Manually: You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port
number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the
LAN.
（2） Scanning: You can quickly get the information of the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID
and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function,
and bind them conveniently. You are only requested to enter the range of the IP address
on the ARP Scanning page for the scanning.
（3） DHCP Snooping: You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the
Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address, MAC address,
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP-MAC Binding entries. The
entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision. Among the
entries in collision, only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect. These
three sources (Manual, Scanning and Snooping) are in descending order of priority.
The IP-MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table, Manual Binding, ARP
Scanning and DHCP Snooping pages.
12.1.1 Binding Table
On this page, you can view the information of the bound entries.
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Binding Table to load the following
page.
Figure 12-1 Binding Table
175
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Search Option
Source:
Select a Source from the pull-down list and click the Search
button
to view your desired entry in the Binding Table.
• All: All the bound entries will be displayed.
• Manual: Only the manually added entries will be displayed.
• Scanning:
Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning will be
displayed.
• Snooping: Only th
e entries formed via DHCP Snooping will be
displayed.
Binding Table
Select
Option: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding entry
based on the key word you entered.
• Host Name: Click the Select button to quick-
select the
corresponding entry based on the Host Name you entered.
• IP Address: Click the Select button to quick-
select the
corresponding entry based on the IP address you entered.
• MAC Address: Click the Select button to quick-
select the
corresponding entry based on the MAC address you entered.
Select:
Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name, MAC address,
VLAN ID, Port and Protect Type. It is multi-optional.
Host Name:
Allows you to view and modify the Host Name of the entry.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
Allows you to modify the
MAC address of the entry which is from Manual and Scanning.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here. Allows you to modify the VLAN
ID of the
entry which is from Manual and Scanning.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Allows you to
modify the port of the entry which is from Manual and Scanning.
Protect Type:
Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry.
Source:
Displays the Source of the entry.
C
ollision: Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the other
entries.
Note:
1. Among the entries with Critical collision level, the one with the highest Source priority will take
effect.
2. Among the conflicting entries with the same Source priority, only the last added or edited one
will take effect.
176
12.1.2 Manual Binding
You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in
the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Manual Binding to load the following
page.
Figure 12-2 Manual Binding
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Manual Binding Option
Host Name:
Enter the Host Name.
IP Address:
Enter the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Enter the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID.
Port:
Select the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Select the Protect Type for the entry.
Manual Binding Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to be deleted. It is multi-optional.
Host Name:
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.
177
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
12.1.3 ARP Scanning
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding
MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly. IP address is the
address of the Host on Network layer. MAC address, the address of the Host on Data link layer, is
necessary for the packet to reach the very device. So the destination IP address carried in a
packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address.
ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an
ARP Table, where the latest used IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries are stored. When
the Host communicates with a strange Host, ARP works as the following figure shown.
Figure 12-3 ARP Implementation Procedure
（1） Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN: Host A and Host B. To send a packet to Host B,
Host A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host
B exists. If yes, Host A will directly send the packets to Host B. If the corresponding MAC
address is not found in the ARP Table, Host A will broadcast ARP request packet, which
contains the IP address of Host B, the IP address of Host A, and the MAC address of Host A,
in the LAN.
（2） Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted, all hosts in the LAN can receive it. However,
only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request. Host B sends back an ARP reply
packet to Host A, with its MAC address carried in the packet.
（3） Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding
MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding.
ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP
field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN. Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, the switch can get the
IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the
packet and bind them conveniently.
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→ARP Scanning to load the following
page.
178
Figure 12-4 ARP Scanning
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Scanning Option
Start IP Address:
Specify the Start IP Address.
End IP Address:
Specify the End IP Address.
VLAN ID:
Enter the VLAN ID. If blank, the switch will s
end the untagged
packets for scanning.
Scan:
Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN.
Scanning Result
Select:
Select the desired entry to be bound or deleted.
Host Name:
Displays the Host Name here.
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the Host.
MAC Address:
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.
VLAN ID:
Displays the VLAN ID here.
Port:
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.
Protect Type:
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.
Collision:
Displays the Collision status of the entry.
• Warning:
Indicates that the collision may be caused by the
MSTP function.
• Critical:
Indicates that the entry has a collision with the
other entries.
12.1.4 DHCP Snooping
Nowadays, the network is getting larger and more complicated. The amount of the PCs always
exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses. The wireless network and the laptops are widely used
and the locations of the PCs are always changed. Therefore, the corresponding IP address of the
PC should be updated with a few configurations. DHCP（Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, the
179
network configuration protocol optimized and developed based on the BOOTP, functions to solve
the above mentioned problems.
DHCP Working Principle
DHCP works via the “Client/Server” communication mode. The Client applies to the Server for
configuration. The Server assigns the configuration information, such as the IP address, to the
Client, so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source. A Server can assign the IP
address for several Clients, which is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 12-5 Network diagram for DHCP-snooping implementation
For different DHCP Clients, DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods:
（1） Manually assign the IP address: Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to
the specific Client (e.g.: WWW Server) via the DHCP Server.
（2） Automatically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address without an
expiration time limitation to the Clients.
（3） Dynamically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an
expiration time. When the time for the IP address expired, the Client should apply for a
new one.
180
The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically, which is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 12-6 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server
（1） DHCP-DISCOVER Stage: The Client broadcasts the DHCP-DISCOVER packet to find the
DHCP Server.
（2） DHCP-OFFER Stage: Upon receiving the DHCP-DISCOVER packet, the DHCP Server
selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP
addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP-OFFER packet carrying the IP address and
other information.
（3） DHCP-REQUEST Stage: In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the
DHCP-OFFER packets, the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP-OFFER
packet and broadcast the DHCP-REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP
address of the DHCP-OFFER packet.
（4） DHCP-ACK Stage: Since the DHCP-REQUEST packet is broadcasted, all DHCP Servers
on the network segment can receive it. However, only the requested Server processes the
request. If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client, it will
send the DHCP-ACK packet back to the Client. Otherwise, the Server will send the
DHCP-NAK packet to refuse assigning this IP address to the Client.
Option 82
The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format based on the format of BOOTP
packet. The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field. The Option
field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function, for example, the DHCP can transmit the
control information and network parameters via the Option field, so as to assign the IP address to
the Client dynamically. For the details of the DHCP Option, please refer to RFC 2132.
Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client. Upon receiving the DHCP-REQUEST packet,
the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server.
Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate
the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client. The Server
supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters
according to the Option 82, providing more flexible address distribution way.
181
Option 82 can contain 255 sub-options at most. If Option 82 is defined, at least a sub-option
should be defined. This switch supports two sub-options: Circuit ID and Remote ID. Since there is
no universal standard about the content of Option 82, different manufacturers define the
sub-options of Option 82 to their need. For this switch, the sub-options are defined as the following:
The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets
and its VLAN number. The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping
device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients.
DHCP Cheating Attack
During the working process of DHCP, generally there is no authentication mechanism between
Server and Client. If there are several DHCP servers in the network, network confusion and
security problem will happen. The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the
following two:
（1） It’s common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake.
（2） Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be
a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients. For
example, hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server
address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading
website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords. The following figure
illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure.
Figure 12-7 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure
DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP Server as the trusted port to
forward DHCP packets and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses. DHCP Snooping
is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP
address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.
The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection and the other security protection features.
DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the DHCP Server Cheating Attack by
discarding the DHCP packets on the distrusted port, so as to enhance the network security.
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→DHCP Snooping to load the following
page.
182
Figure 12-8 DHCP Snooping
Note:
If you want to enable the DHCP Snooping feature for the member port of LAG, please ensure the
parameters of all the member ports are the same.
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
DHCP Snooping Config
DHCP Snooping:
Enable/Disable the DHCP Snooping function globally.
Global Flow Control:
Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP
messages that c
an be forwarded by the switch per second. The
183
excessive massages will be discarded.
Decline Threshold:
Select the value to specify the minimum transmission rate of the
Decline packets to trigger the Decline protection for the specific
port.
Decline Flo
w Control:
Select the value to specify the Decline Flow Control. The traffic
flow of the corresponding port will be limited to be this value if
the transmission rate of the Decline packets exceeds the
Decline Threshold.
Option 82 Config
Option 82 Support:
Enable/Disable the Option 82 feature.
Existed Option 82 field:
Select the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request
packets from the Host.
•
Keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets.
•
Replace: Indicates to replace the Option 82
field of the
packets with the switch defined one.
•
Drop:
Indicates to discard the packets including the Option
82 field.
Customization:
Enable/Disable the switch to define the Option 82.
Circuit ID:
Enter the sub-option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82.
Remote ID:
Enter the sub-option Remote ID for the customized Option 82.
Port Config
Port Select:
Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Trusted Port:
Select Enable/Disable the port to be a Trusted Port. Only the
Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP
servers.
MAC Verify:
Select Enable/Disable the MAC Verify feature
. There are two
fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the
Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and
discard the packet if the two fields are different.
Flow Control:
Select Enable/Disable the Flow Control feature for
the DHCP
packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded.
Decline Protect:
Select Enable/Disable the Decline Protect feature.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.
184
12.2 ARP Inspection
According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 12.1.3 ARP Scanning, it can be found
that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one
another or access to external network via Gateway. However, since ARP protocol is implemented
with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted, there are high security risks during
ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network. Thus, the cheating attacks against
ARP, such as imitating Gateway, cheating Gateway, cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding
Attack, frequently occur to the network, especially to the large network such as campus network
and so on. The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks.
Imitating Gateway
The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host, and then the Host will
automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response packets, which causes that
the Host cannot access the network normally. The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway
is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 12-9 ARP Attack - Imitating Gateway
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway
address to the normal Host, and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after
receiving the ARP packets. When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway, the Host will
encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the
normal communication.
Cheating Gateway
The attacker sends the wrong IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the
Gateway, which causes that the Gateway cannot communicate with the legal terminal Hosts
normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure.
185
Figure 12-10 ARP Attack – Cheating Gateway
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway,
and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets.
When the Gateway tries to communicate with Host A in LAN, it will encapsulate this false
destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.
Cheating Terminal Hosts
The attacker sends the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host/Server
to another terminal Host, which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment
cannot communicate with each other normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal
Hosts is illustrated in the following figure.
186
Figure 12-11 ARP Attack – Cheating Terminal Hosts
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B, and then
Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets. When Host B tries
to communicate with Host A, it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets,
which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.
Man-In-The-Middle Attack
The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the
Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table. When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another, they
will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table. Thus, the attacker can get
and process the packets before forwarding them. During the procedure, the communication
packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of
the attack. That is called Man-In-The-Middle Attack. The Man-In-The-Middle Attack is illustrated in
the following figure.
187
Figure 12-12 Man-In-The-Middle Attack
Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another through a switch.
Host A: IP address is 192.168.0.101; MAC address is 00-00-00-11-11-11.
Host B: IP address is 192.168.0.102; MAC address is 00-00-00-22-22-22.
Attacker: IP address is 192.168.0.103; MAC address is 00-00-00-33-33-33.
1. First, the attacker sends the false ARP response packets.
2. Upon receiving the ARP response packets, Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their
own.
3. When Host A communicates with Host B, it will send the packets to the false destination MAC
address, i.e. to the attacker, according to the updated ARP table.
4. After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B, the attacker processes
and forwards the packets to the correct destination MAC address, which makes Host A and
Host B keep a normal-appearing communication.
5. The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make
the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table.
In the view of Host A and Host B, their packets are directly sent to each other. But in fact, there is a
Man-In-The-Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure. This kind
of ARP attack is called Man-In-The-Middle attack.
ARP Flooding Attack
The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the
network bandwidth viciously, which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed. Meantime,
the Gateway learns the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries from these ARP
packets and updates its ARP table. As a result, the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries
and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts, which causes that the legal Hosts cannot
access the external network.
188
The IP-MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID
and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch. Based
on the predefined IP-MAC Binding entries, the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets
and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks.
The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect, ARP Defend and ARP
Statistics pages.
12.2.1 ARP Detect
ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets based on the bound entries in
the IP-MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets, so as to prevent the network from
ARP attacks, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.
Choose the menu Network Security →ARP Inspection →ARP Detect to load the following
page.
Figure 12-13 ARP Detect
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ARP Detect
ARP Detect:
Enable/Disable the ARP Detect function, and click the Apply
button to
apply.
Trusted Port
Trusted Port:
Select the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as
the Trusted Port. The specific ports, such as up-
linked port, routing
port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To ensure the
norma
l communication of the switch, please configure the ARP
Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function.
Note:
ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time.
189
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Bind the IP address
, MAC
address, VLAN ID and the
connected Port number of
the Host together.
Required. On the IP-MAC Binding
page, bind the IP
address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the connected Port
number of the Host together via Manual Binding, ARP
Scanning or DHCP Snooping.
2
Enable the protection for the
bound entry.
Required. On the Network Security→IP-MAC
Binding→Binding Table page, specify a protect type for
the corresponding bound entry.
3
Specify the trusted port. Required. On the Network Security→ARP
Inspection→ARP Detect page, specify the trusted port.
The specific ports, such as up-linked port
, routing port
and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port.
4
Enable ARP Detect feature. Required. On the Network Security→ARP
Inspection→ARP Detect
page, enable the ARP Detect
feature.
12.2.2 ARP Defend
With the ARP Defend enabled, the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300
seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined
value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood.
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Defend to load the following page.
Figure 12-14 ARP Defend
190
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
ARP Defend
Port Select:
Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
Defend:
Select Enable/Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port.
Speed:
Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP
packets per second.
Curr
ent Speed: Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets.
Status:
Displays the status of the ARP attack.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.
Operation:
Click the Recover
button to restore the port to the normal status.
The ARP Defend for this port will be re-enabled.
Note:
1. It’s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port.
2. ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time.
12.2.3 ARP Statistics
ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port, which
facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures.
191
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Statistics to load the following
page.
Figure 12-15 ARP Statistics
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh:
Enable/Disable the Auto Refresh feature.
Ref
resh Interval: Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics.
Illegal ARP Packet
Port:
Displays the port number.
Trusted Port:
Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not.
Illegal ARP Packet:
Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets.
12.3 DoS Defend
DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network
attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host, which incurs an
abnormal service or even breakdown of the network.
With DoS Defend function enabled, the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and
distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets. Upon detecting the packets, the switch will discard
the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal
packets may incur a breakdown of the network. The switch can defend a few types of DoS attack
listed in the following table.
192
DoS Attack Type Description
Land Attack The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host.
Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN
packet are set to be the IP address of the Host, the Host will be trapped in
an endless circle for building the initial connection. The performance of the
network will be reduced extremely.
Scan SYNFIN The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1.
The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is
used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this type is illegal.
The switch can defend this type of illegal packet.
Xmascan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN, URG and
PSH field set to 1.
NULL Scan Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control
fields set to 0. During the TCP connection and data transmission, the
packets with all the control fields set to 0 are considered as the illegal
packets.
SYN packet with its source port
less than 1024
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and
source port less than 1024.
Blat Attack The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and destination
port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1. Similar to the Land
Attack, the system performance of the attacked Host is reduced since the
Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker.
Ping Flooding The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm
packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication.
SYN/SYN-ACK Flooding The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the
Server. Upon receiving the request packets, the Server responds with
SYN-ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response will be
returned. The Server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the attacker
sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource will be
occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied.
Table 12-1 Defendable DoS Attack Types
On this page, you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need.
193
Choose the menu Network Security→DoS Defend→DoS Defend to load the following page.
Figure 12-16 DoS Defend
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Configure
DoS Defend:
Enable/Disable DoS Defend function.
Defend Table
Select:
Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type.
Defend Type:
Displays the Defend Type name.
Tips:
You are suggested to take the following further steps to ensure the network security.
1. It’s recommended to inspect and repair the system vulnerability regularly. It is also necessary
to install the system bulletins and backup the important information in time.
2. The network administrator is suggested to inspect the physic environment of the network and
block the unnecessary network services.
3. Enhance the network security via the protection devices, such as the hardware firewall.
12.4 802.1X
The 802.1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN/WAN committee to deal with the security
issues of wireless LANs. It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for
LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems.
802.1X is a port-based network access control protocol. It authenticates and controls devices
requesting for access in terms of the ports of LAN access control devices. With the 802.1X
protocol enabled, a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authentication,
whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN.
194
Architecture of 802.1X Authentication
802.1X adopts a client/server architecture with three entities: a supplicant system, an
authenticator system, and an authentication server system, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 12-17 Architecture of 802.1X authentication
（1） Supplicant System: The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the
authenticator system. The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer.
An 802.1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the
supplicant system. Note that the client program must support the 802.1X authentication
protocol.
（2） Authenticator System: The authenticator system is usually an 802.1X-supported network
device, such as this TP-LINK switch. It provides the physical or logical port for the
supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system.
（3） Authentication Server System: The authentication server system is an entity that
provides authentication service to the authenticator system. Normally in the form of a
RADIUS server. Authentication Server can store user information and serve to perform
authentication and authorization. To ensure a stable authentication system, an alternate
authentication server can be specified. If the main authentication server is in trouble, the
alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service.
The Mechanism of an 802.1X Authentication System
IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) to exchange
information between the supplicant system and the authentication server.
（1） EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator
system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets.
（2） EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS
server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR (EAP over RADIUS) packets or be
terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with
RADIUS servers through PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) or CHAP (Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol) protocol packets.
（3） When a supplicant system passes the authentication, the authentication server passes the
information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system. The authenticator
system in turn determines the state (authorized or unauthorized) of the controlled port
according to the instructions (accept or reject) received from the RADIUS server.
195
802.1X Authentication Procedure
An 802.1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant system or authenticator system. When the
authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN, it will initiate the 802.1X
authentication by sending EAP-Request/Identity packets to the supplicant. The supplicant system
can also launch an 802.1X client program to initiate an 802.1X authentication through the sending
of an EAPOL-Start packet to the switch,
This TP-LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating
mode. The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802.1X authentication procedure
initiated by the supplicant system for example.
（1） EAP Relay Mode
This mode is defined in 802.1X. In this mode, EAP-packets are encapsulated in higher level
protocol (such as EAPOR) packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server.
This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP: the
EAP-message field and the Message-authenticator field. This switch supports EAP-MD5
authentication way for the EAP relay mode. The following figure describes the basic EAP-MD5
authentication procedure.
Figure 12-18 EAP-MD5 Authentication Procedure
1. A supplicant system launches an 802.1X client program via its registered user name and
password to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL-Start packet to the
switch. The 802.1X client program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the
authentication process.
2. Upon receiving the authentication request packet, the switch sends an EAP-Request/Identity
packet to ask the 802.1X client program for the user name.
3. The 802.1X client program responds by sending an EAP-Response/Identity packet to the
switch with the user name included. The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS
Access-Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server.
196
4. Upon receiving the user name from the switch, the RADIUS server retrieves the user name,
finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database, encrypts the
password using a randomly-generated key, and sends the key to the switch through an
RADIUS Access-Challenge packet. The switch then sends the key to the 802.1X client
program.
5. Upon receiving the key (encapsulated in an EAP-Request/MD5 Challenge packet) from the
switch, the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and
sends the encrypted password (contained in an EAP-Response/MD5 Challenge packet) to
the RADIUS server through the switch. (The encryption is irreversible.)
6. The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password (contained in a RADIUS
Access-Request packet) with the locally-encrypted password. If the two match, it will then
send feedbacks (through a RADIUS Access-Accept packet and an EAP-Success packet) to
the switch to indicate that the supplicant system is authorized.
7. The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the
supplicant system access the network. And then the switch will monitor the status of
supplicant by sending hand-shake packets periodically. By default, the switch will force the
supplicant to log off if it cannot get the response from the supplicant for two times.
8. The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL-Logoff
packets to the switch. The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected.
（2） EAP Terminating Mode
In this mode, packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are
mapped into RADIUS packets. Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS
protocol.
In this mode, PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server. This switch
supports the PAP terminating mode. The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the
following figure.
Figure 12-19 PAP Authentication Procedure
In PAP mode, the switch encrypts the password and sends the user name, the
randomly-generated key, and the supplicant system-encrypted password to the RADIUS server for
197
further authentication. Whereas the randomly-generated key in EAP-MD5 relay mode is generated
by the authentication server, and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication
packet and forward it to the RADIUS server.
802.1X Timer
In 802.1 x authentication, the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system, the
switch, and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way:
（1） Supplicant system timer (Supplicant Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch
after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system. The switch will resend the
request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the
specified timeout period.
（2） RADIUS server timer (Server Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch after the
switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server. The switch will resend
the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified
timeout period.
（3） Quiet-period timer (Quiet Period): This timer sets the quiet-period. When a supplicant
system fails to pass the authentication, the switch quiets for the specified period before it
processes another authentication request re-initiated by the supplicant system.
Guest VLAN
Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to access the
specific network resource.
By default, all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN, i.e. Guest VLAN. Users
belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being
authenticated. But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources. After
passing the authentication, the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to
access the other resources.
With the Guest VLAN function enabled, users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802.1X client
program or upgrade their 802.1x clients without being authenticated. If there is no supplicant past
the authentication on the port in a certain time, the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN.
With 802.1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured, after the maximum number retries
have been made to send the EAP-Request/Identity packets and there are still ports that have not
sent any response back, the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to
their link types. Only when the corresponding user passes the 802.1X authentication, the port will
be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN. In addition, the port will back
to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off.
The 802.1X function is implemented on the Global Config, Port Config and Radius Server
pages.
12.4.1 Global Config
On this page, you can enable the 802.1X authentication function globally and control the
authentication process by specifying the Authentication Method, Guest VLAN and various Timers.
198
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 12-20 Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
802.1X:
Enable/Disable the 802.1X function.
Authentication Method:
Select the Authentication Method from the pull-down list.
• EAP-MD5: IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses
extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange
information between the switch and the client.
EAP protocol packets with authentication data can be
encapsulated in the advanced protocol (such as
RADIUS) packets to be transmitted to the authentication
server.
• PAP:
IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses
extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange
information between the switch and the client. The
transmission of EAP packets is terminated at the switch
and the EAP packets are converted to the other protocol
(such as RADIUS) packets for transmission.
Guest VLAN:
Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature.
Guest VLAN ID:
Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN
feature. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the
specified network source.
Authentication Config
Quiet:
Enable/Disable the Quiet timer.
199
Quiet Period:
Specify a value for Quiet Period. Once the supplicant failed to
the 802.1X Authentication, then the switch will not respond to
the authentication request from the same supplicant during
the Quiet Period.
Retry Times:
Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated
authentication request.
Supplicant Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from supplicant before resending a request to the
supplicant.
Server Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the
response from authentication server before resending a reques
t
to the authentication server.
12.4.2 Port Config
On this page, you can configure the 802.1X features for the ports based on the actual network.
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 12-21 Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Port Config
Port Select:
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Select:
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.
Port:
Displays the port number.
200
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the 802.1X authentication feature for the
port.
Guest VLAN:
Select Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port.
Control Mode:
Specify the Control Mode for the port.
• Auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after
passing the 802.1X Authentication.
• Force-Authorized: In this mode, the port can work normally
without passing the 802.1X Authentication.
• Force-Unauthorized: In this mode, the port is forbidden
working for its fixed unauthorized status.
Control Type:
Specify the Control Type for the port.
• MAC Based: Any client connected to the port should pass the
802.1X Authentication for access.
• Port Based: All the clients connected to the port can access
the network on the condition that any one of the clients has
passed the 802.1X Authentication.
Authorized:
Displays the authentication status of the port.
LAG:
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.
12.4.3 Radius Server
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) server provides the authentication service
for the switch via the stored client information, such as the user name, password, etc, with the
purpose to control the authentication and accounting status of the clients. On this page, you can
configure the parameters of the authentication server.
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Radius Server to load the following page.
Figure 12-22 Radius Server
201
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Authentication Config
Primary IP:
Enter the IP address of the authentication server.
Secondary IP:
Enter the IP address of the alternate authentication server.
Authentication Port:
Set the UDP port of authentication server(s). The default port is
1812
Key Modify：
Select to modify the authentication key.
Authentication KEY:
Set the s
hared password for the switch and the authentication
servers to exchange messages.
Accounting Config
Accounting:
Enable/Disable the accounting feature.
Primary IP:
Enter the IP address of the accounting server.
Secondary IP:
Enter the IP address of the alternate accounting server.
Accounting Port:
Set the UDP port of accounting server(s). The default port is 1813.
Key Modify：
Select to modify the accounting key.
Accounting Key:
Set the shared password for the switch and the accounting
servers to exchange messages.
Note:
1. The 802.1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port.
2. The 802.1X function cannot be enabled for LAG member ports. That is, the port with 802.1X
function enabled cannot be added to the LAG.
3. The 802.1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server.
In addition, the authentication parameters of the switch and the authentication server should be
the same.
Configuration Procedure:
Step Operation Description
1
Connect an authentication
server to the switch and do
some configuration.
Required. Record the information of the client in the LAN to
the authentication server and configure the corresponding
authentication username and password for the client.
2
Install the 802.1X client
software.
Required. For the client computers, you are required to
install the TP-LINK 802.1X Clie
nt provided on the CD.
Please refer to the software guide in the same directory with
the software for more information.
3
Configure the 802.1X
globally.
Required. By default, the global 802.1X function is disabled.
On the Network Security→802.1X→Global Config page,
configure the 802.1X function globally.
4 Configure the parameters of
the authentication server
Required. On the Network Security→802.1X→Radius
Server page, configure the parameters of the server.
202
Chapter 13 SNMP
SNMP Overview
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) has gained the most extensive application on the
UDP/IP networks. SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network
devices. It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical
differences of the devices. Currently, most network management systems are based on SNMP.
SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures
and too much network resources. With SNMP function enabled, network administrators can easily
monitor the network performance, detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices. In
the meantime, they can locate faults promptly and implement the fault diagnosis, capacity planning
and report generating.
SNMP Management Frame
SNMP management frame includes three network elements: SNMP Management Station, SNMP
Agent and MIB (Management Information Base).
SNMP Management Station: SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the
SNMP client program, providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage
the most network devices conveniently.
SNMP Agent: Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of
receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station. In the meanwhile,
Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status
changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as device reboot.
MIB: MIB is the set of the managed objects. MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects,
including the names, the access rights, and the data types. Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB.
The SNMP Management station can read/write the MIB objects based on its management right.
SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed
object. The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged
through SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). The relationship among SNMP
Management Station, SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 13-1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements
SNMP Versions
This switch supports SNMP v3, and is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c. The SNMP
versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same.
Otherwise, SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent cannot communicate with each other
normally. You can select the management mode with proper security level according to your actual
application requirement.
204
SNMP v1: SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication. The community name is used to
define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent. The SNMP packets
failing to pass community name authentication are discarded. The community name can limit
access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS, functioning as a password.
SNMP v2c: SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication. It is compatible with SNMP
v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1.
SNMP v3: Based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and
manageability. It adopts VACM (View-based Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based
Security Model) authentication. The user can configure the authentication and the encryption
functions. The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the
senders of packets. Meanwhile, the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted
between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information being
stolen. The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can
guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent.
MIB Introduction
To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages, SNMP adopts the
hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects. It is like a tree, and each tree node
represents a managed object, as shown in the following figure. Thus the object can be identified
with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers. The number string
is the Object Identifier of the managed object. In the following figure, the OID of the managed
object B is {1.2.1.1}. While the OID of the managed object A is {1.2.1.1.5}.
Figure 13-2 Architecture of the MIB tree
SNMP Configuration Outline
1. Create View
The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects. The
managed object, uniquely identified by OID, can be set to under or out of the management of
SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type (included/excluded). The OID of managed
object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station.
2. Create SNMP Group
After creating the SNMP View, it’s required to create an SNMP Group. The Group Name, Security
Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group. The Groups with these three
items the same are considered to be the same. You can configure SNMP Group to control the
network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the
Read View, Write View and Notify View.
205
3. Create SNMP User
The User configured in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on
management station. The specified User Name and the Auth/Privacy Password are used for
SNMP Management Station to access the SNMP Agent, functioning as the password.
SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch, including three submenus:
SNMP Config, Notification and RMON.
13.1 SNMP Config
The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config, SNMP View, SNMP Group,
SNMP User and SNMP Community pages.
13.1.1 Global Config
To enable SNMP function, please configure the SNMP function globally on this page.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 13-3 Global Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
SNMP:
Enable/Disable the SNMP function.
Local Engine
Local Engine ID:
Specify t
he switch’s Engine ID for the remote clients. The
Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the
SNMP engine on the switch.
Remote Engine
Remote Engine ID:
Specify the Remote Engine ID for switch. The Engine ID is a
unique alphanumeric str
ing used to identify the SNMP engine
on the remote device which receives traps and informs from
switch.
206
Note:
The amount of Engine ID characters must be even.
13.1.2 SNMP View
The OID (Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the
switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set of the OIDs. The SNMP View is
created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP View to load the following page.
Figure 13-4 SNMP View
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
View Config
View Name:
Give a name to the View for identification. Each View can
include several entries with the same name.
MIB Object ID:
Enter the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of View.
View Type:
Select the type for the view entry.
•
Include: The view entry can be managed by the SNMP
management station.
• Exclude: The view entry cannot
be managed by the SNMP
management station.
View Table
Select:
Se
lect the desired entry to delete the corresponding view. All
the entries of a View will be deleted together.
View Name:
Displays the name of the View entry.
View Type:
Displays the type of the View entry.
MIB Object ID:
Displays the OID of the View entry.
207
13.1.3 SNMP Group
On this page, you can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users
in various groups with different management rights via the Read View, Write View and Notify View.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Group to load the following page.
Figure 13-5 SNMP Group
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Group Config
Group Name:
Enter the SNMP Group name. The Group Name, Security Model
and Security Level compose t
he identifier of the SNMP Group.
The Groups with these three items the same are considered to be
the same.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group.
• v1:
SNMPv1 is defined for the group. In this model, the
Community Name is used for au
thentication. SNMP v1 can be
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.
• v2c:
SNMPv2c is defined for the group. In this model, the
Community Name is used for authentication. SNMP v2c can be
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.
• v3: SNMPv3 is
defined for the group. In this model, the USM
mechanism is used for authentication. If SNMPv3 is enabled,
the Security Level field is enabled for configuration.
Security Level:
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group.
• noAuthNoPriv: No authenticatio
n and no privacy security
level is used.
• authNoPriv: Only the authentication security level is used.
•
authPriv: Both the authentication and the privacy security
levels are used.
208
Read View:
Select the View to be the Read View. The management access is
restricted to read-
only, and changes cannot be made to the
assigned SNMP View.
Write View:
Select the View to be the Write View. The management access is
writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP
View. The View defined both as the Read View a
nd the Write View
can be read and modified.
Notify View:
Select the View to be the Notify View. The management station
can receive trap messages of the assigned SNMP view generated
by the switch's SNMP agent.
Group Table
Select:
Select the desired entry
to delete the corresponding group. It is
multi-optional.
Group Name:
Displays the Group Name here.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the group.
Security Level:
Displays the Security Level of the group.
Read View:
Displays the Read View name in the entry.
Write View:
Displays the Write View name in the entry.
Notify View:
Displays the Notify View name in the entry.
Operation:
Click the Edit
button to modify the Views in the entry and click the
Modify button to apply.
Note:
Every Group should contain a Read View. The default Read View is viewDefault.
13.1.4 SNMP User
The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software. The
User and its Group have the same security level and access right. You can configure the SNMP
User on this page.
209
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP User to load the following page.
Figure 13-6 SNMP User
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
User Config
User Name:
Enter the User Name here.
User Type:
Select the type for the User.
•
Local User: Indicates that the user is connected to a
local SNMP engine.
• Remote User: Indicates that the user is connected to a
remote SNMP engine.
Group Name:
Select the Group Name of the User. The User is classified to
the corresponding Group accor
ding to its Group Name,
Security Model and Security Level.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model for the User.
Security Level:
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.
Auth Mode:
Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User.
• None: No authentication method is used.
•
MD5: The port authentication is performed via
HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
• SHA: The port authentication is performed via SHA
(Secure Hash Algorithm). This authentication mode has a
higher security than MD5 mode.
Auth Password:
Enter the password for authentication.
Privacy Mode:
Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User.
• None: No privacy method is used.
• DES: DES encryption method is used.
210
Privacy Password:
Enter the Privacy Password.
User Table
Select:
Select the desired entry
to delete the corresponding User. It
is multi-optional.
User Name:
Displays the name of the User.
User Type:
Displays the User Type.
Group Name:
Displays the Group Name of the User.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the User.
Security Le
vel: Displays the Security Level of the User.
Auth Mode:
Displays the Authentication Mode of the User.
Privacy Mode:
Displays the Privacy Mode of the User.
Operation:
Click the Edit
button to modify the Group of the User and
click the Modify button to apply.
Note:
The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level.
13.1.5 SNMP Community
SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication. The community name can limit
access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password. If
SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c is employed, you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this
page without configuring SNMP Group and User.
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Community to load the following page.
Figure 13-7 SNMP Community
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Community Config
Community Name:
Enter the Community Name here.
211
Access:
Defines the access rights of the community.
• read-only:
Management right of the Community is
restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to
the corresponding View.
• read-write: Management right of the Community is
read-write and changes can be made to the corresponding
View.
MIB View:
Select the MIB View for the community to access.
Community Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community. It
is multi
-optional.
Community Name:
Displays the Community Name here.
Access:
Displays the right of the Community to access the View.
MIB View:
Displays the Views which the Community can access.
Operation:
Click the
Edit
button to modify the MIB View and the Access right
of the Community, and then click the
Modify button to apply.
Note:
The default MIB View of SNMP Community is viewDefault.
Configuration Procedure:
If SNMPv3 is employed, please take the following steps:
Step Operation Description
1 Enable SNMP function globally. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→Global
Config page, enable SNMP function globally.
2 Create SNMP View. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
View
page, create SNMP View of the management
agent. The default View Name is viewDefault and the
default OID is 1.
3 Create SNMP Group. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
Group
page, create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and
specify SNMP Views with various access levels for
SNMP Group.
4 Create SNMP User. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
User page, create SNMP User in the Group and
configure the auth/privacy mode and auth/privacy
password for the User.
212
If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is employed, please take the following steps:
Step Operation Description
1 Enable SNMP function globally. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→Global
Config page, enable SNMP function globally.
2 Create SNMP View. Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP View
page, create SNMP View of the management agent. The
default View Name is viewDefault and the default OID is
1.
3
Configure
access
level for
the User.
Create SNMP
Community
directly.
Required alternatively.
Create SNMP Community directly.
On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP
Community page, create SNMP Community based
on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c.
Create SNMP Group and SNMP User.
Similar to the configuration way based on SNMPv3,
you can create SNMP Group and SNMP User of
SNMP v1/v2c. The User name can limit access to
the SNMP agent from SNMP network management
station, functioning as a community name. The
users can manage the device via the Read View,
Write View and Notify V
iew defined in the SNMP
Group.
Create SNMP
Group and SNMP
User.
13.2 Notification
With the Notification function enabled, the switch can initiatively report to the management station
about the important events that occur on the Views (e.g., the managed device is rebooted), which
allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time.
The notification information includes the following two types:
Trap ：Trap is the information that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network
management station without request.
Inform：Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply. The switch
will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the response from the management station during
the Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach
the specified Retry times. The Inform type, employed on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3, has a higher
security than the Trap type.
On this page, you can configure the notification function of SNMP.
213
Choose the menu SNMP → Notification → Notification to load the following page.
Figure 13-8 Notification Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Create Notification
IP
Mode: Select the IP Mode.
IP Address:
Enter the IP Address of the management Host.
UDP Port:
Enter the number of the UDP port used to send notifications. The UDP
port functions with the IP address for the notification sending. The
default is 162.
User:
Enter the User name of the management station.
Security Model:
Select the Security Model of the management station.
Security Level:
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.
• noAuthNoPriv: No authentication and no privacy security level is
used.
• authNoPriv: Only the authentication security level is used.
• authPriv:
Both the authentication and the privacy security levels
are used.
Type:
Select the type for the notifications.
• Trap: Indicates traps are sent.
• Inform:
Indicates informs are sent. The Inform type has a higher
security than the Trap type.
Retry:
Specify the amount of times the switch resends an inform request.
The
switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the response from
the management station during the Timeout
interval, and it will
terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the
specified Retry times.
Timeout:
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from
the management station before resending a request.
Notification Table
Select:
Select the desired entry to delete the
corresponding management
station.
214
IP Address:
Displays the IP Address of the management host.
IP Mode:
Displays the IP Mode of the management host.
UDP Port:
Displays the UDP port used to send notifications.
User:
Displays the User name of the management station.
Security Model:
Displays the Security Model of the management station.
Security Level:
Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.
Type:
Displays the type of the notifications.
Timeout:
Displays the maximum time for the switch to wa
it for the response
from the management station before resending a request.
Retry:
Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform request.
Operation:
Click the Edit button to modify the corresponding entry and click the
Modify button to apply.
13.3 RMON
RMON (Remote Monitoring) based on SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
architecture, functions to monitor the network. RMON is currently a commonly used network
management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), which is mainly used to
monitor the data traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the
network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction. In
addition, RMON MIB records network statistics information of network performance and
malfunction periodically, based on which the management station can monitor network at any time
effectively. RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large-scale network since it
reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent.
RMON Group
This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard (RFC1757):
History Group, Event Group, Statistic Group and Alarm Group.
RMON Group Function
History Group After a history group is configured, the switch collects and records network
statistics information periodically, based on which the management station
can monitor network effectively.
Event Group Event Group is used to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is
detected.
Statistic Group Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific
ports.
Alarm Group Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables. When the
value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event is
generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.
The RMON Groups can be configured on the History Control, Event Config and Alarm Config
pages.
215
13.3.1 History Control
On this page, you can configure the History Group for RMON.
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→History Control to load the following page.
Figure 13-9 History Control
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
History Control Table
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
Port:
Specify the port from which the history samples were taken.
Interval:
Specify the interval to take samplings from the port.
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding sampling entry.
13.3.2 Event Config
On this page, you can configure the RMON events.
216
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Event Config to load the following page.
Figure 13-10 Event Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Event Table
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
User:
Enter the name of the User or the community to which the
event belongs.
Description:
Give a description to the event for identification.
Type:
Select the event type, which determines the act way of the
network device in response to an event.
• None: No processing.
• Log: Logging the event.
• Notify: Sending trap messages to the management station.
• Log&Notify: Logging the event and sending trap messages
to the management station.
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding event entry.
13.3.3 Alarm Config
On this page, you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON.
217
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Alarm Config to load the following page.
Figure 13-11 Alarm Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Alarm Table
Select:
Select the desired entry for configuration.
Index:
Displays the index number of the entry.
Variable:
Select the alarm variables from the pull-down list.
Port:
Select the port on which the Alarm entry acts.
Sample Type:
Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and
comparing the value against the thresholds.
• Absolute:
Compares the values directly with the thresholds at
the end of the sampling interval.
• Delta: Subtracts the last sampled value from the current value.
The difference in the values is compared to the threshold.
Rising Threshold:
Enter the rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold
alarm.
Risin
g Event: Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if
the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold.
Falling Threshold:
Enter the falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold
alarm.
Falling Event:
Select the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if
the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold.
Alarm Type:
Specify the type of the alarm.
• All: The alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value
exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold.
• Rising: When the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold,
an alarm event is triggered.
• Falling:
When the sampled value is under the Falling
Threshold, an alarm event is triggered.
Interval:
Enter the alarm interval time in seconds.
218
Owner:
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.
Status:
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding alarm entry.
Note:
When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times,
an alarm event will only be generated on the first time, that is, the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm
are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and
vice versa.
Return to CONTENTS
219
Chapter 14 Cluster
With the development of network technology, the network scale is getting larger and more network
devices are required, which may result in a more complicated network management system. As a
large number of devices need to be assigned different network addresses and every management
device needs to be respectively configured to meet the application requirements, manpower are
needed.
The Cluster Management function can solve the above problem. It is mainly used to central
manage the scattered devices in the network. A network administrator can manage and maintain
the switches in the cluster via a management switch. The management switch is the commander
of the cluster and the others are member switches.
The typical topology is as follows.
Figure 14-1 Cluster topology
Cluster Role
According to their functions and status in a cluster, switches in the cluster play different roles. You
can specify the role a switch plays. There are three roles.
Commander Switch: Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a
cluster. It discovers and determins the candidate switches by collecting NDP (Neighbor Discovery
Protocol) and NTDP (Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol).
Member Switch: Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster.
Candidate Switch: Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be
added to a cluster.
Individual Switch: Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled
The roles can be changed from one to anther following the specified rules.
220
The current switch you create cluster is specified as the commander switch.
The commander switch discovers and determines candidate switches by collecting related
information.
After being added to the cluster, the candidate switch becomes to be the member switch,
After being removed from the cluster, the member switch becomes to be the candidate switch.
The commander switch becomes to be the candidate switch only when the cluster is deleted.
Note:
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch cannot be configured as commander
switch to manage the cluster.
Introduction to Cluster
Cluster functions to configure and manage the switches in the cluster based on three protocols,
NDP, NTDP and CMP (Cluster Management Protocol).
NDP: All switches get neighbor information by collecting NDP.
NTDP: The commander switch collects the NDP information and neighboring connection
information of each device in a specific network range to determine the candidate switches in
the cluster.
Cluster maintenance: The commander switch adds the candidate switch to the cluster and
removes the member switch from the cluster according to the collected NTDP information.
The Cluster module, mainly used for cluster management configuration, including three submenus:
NDP, NTDP and Cluster.
14.1 NDP
NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) is used to get the information of the directly connected neighbor
devices to support cluster establishing. An NDP-enabled device sends NDP packets regularly to
neighbor devices as well as receives NDP packets from neighbor devices. An NDP packet carries
the NDP information (including the device name, MAC address, firmware version and so on).
A switch keeps and maintains a neighbor information table, which contains the NDP information of
each neighbor switch. If a switch receives the NDP information of a new neighbor, it will add the
information to the neighbor information table. If the received NDP information is different from the
old information, the switch will update it in the neighbor information table; if the received NDP
information is the same with the old information, the switch will just update the aging time; if the
switch does not receive NDP information within the aging time, the switch will remove the
corresponding information from the table automatically.
The NDP function can be implemented on Neighbor Info, NDP Summary and NDP Config
pages.
14.1.1 Neighbor Info
On this page you can view the NDP neighbor information of the switch.
221
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→Neighbor Info to load the following page.
Figure 14-2 Neighbor Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Neighbor
Search Option: Select the information the desired entry should contain
and then
click the Search button to display the desired entry in the following
Neighbor Information table.
Neighbor Info
Native Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
Remote Port:
Displays the port number of the neighbor switch which is
connected to the corresponding port.
Device Name: Displays the name of the neighbor switch.
Device MAC: Displays MAC address of the neighbor switch.
Firmware Version: Displays the firmware version of the neighbor switch.
Aging Time: Displays the period for the
switch to keep the NDP packets from
the neighbor switch.
14.1.2 NDP Summary
On this page you can view the NDP configuration of the switch.
222
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→NDP Summary to load the following page.
Figure 14-3 NDP Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
NDP:
Displays the global NDP status (enabled or disabled) for the
switch.
Aging Time: Displays the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP
packets from this switch.
Hello Time: Displays the interval to send NDP packets.
Port Status
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
NDP: Displays the NDP status (enabled or disabled) for the current port.
Send NDP Packets: Displays the count of currently sent NDP packets.
Receive NDP Packets:
Displays the count of currently received NDP packets.
Error NDP Packets: Displays the count of currently received error NDP packets.
Neighbors: Displays the count of the connected neighbors.
Detail
：
Click the Detail button to view the complete information collected for
the port.
223
14.1.3 NDP Config
On this page you can configure the NDP function for the switch.
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→NDP Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-4 NDP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
NDP: Select Enable/Disable NDP function globally.
Aging Time:
Enter the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets
from this switch.
Hello Time: Enter the interval to send NDP packets.
Port Config
Select: Select the desired port to configure its NDP status.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
NDP: Displays NDP status of the current port.
Enable: Click the Enable button to enable NDP for the port you select.
Disable: Click the Disable button to disable NDP for the port you select.
224
Note:
1. NDP function is effective only when NDP function is enabled globally and for the port.
2. The aging time should be set over the hello time value; otherwise this setting will be invalid
and will not take effect.
14.2 NTDP
NTDP (Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol）is used for the commander switch to collect NDP
information. NTDP transmits and forwards NTDP topology collection request based on NDP
neighbor information table, and collects the NDP information and neighboring connection
information of each device in a specific network range. The commander switch can collects the
specified topology in the network regularly and you can also enable topology collection manually
on the commander switch.
After the commander switch sends out NTDP request packets, lots of switches receive the request
packets and send out response packets at the same time, which may result in network congestion
and the commander switch overload. To avoid the above problem, two time parameters are
designed to control the spread speed of NTDP request packets.
NTDP hop delay: Indicates the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and
the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time.
NTDP port delay: Indicates the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its
adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over.
The NTDP function can be implemented on Device Table, NTDP Summary and NTDP Config
pages.
14.2.1 Device Table
On this page you can view the information of the devices collected by NTDP. Meanwhile, no matter
whether a cluster is established, on this page you can manually collect NTDP information at any
time to manage and control devices.
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→Device Table to load the following page.
Figure 14-5 Device Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Device Table
Device Type: Displays the device description collected through NTDP.
Device MAC: Displays the MAC address of this device.
Cluster Name: Displays the cluster name of this device.
225
Role: Displays the role this device plays in the cluster.
Commander: Indicates the device that can configure and
manage all the devices in a cluster.
Member: Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster.
Candidate: Indicates the device that does not belong to any
cluster though it can be added to a cluster.
Individual: Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled.
Hops: Displays the hop count from this device to the switch.
Neighbor Info: Click the Detail
button to view the complete information of this
device and its neighbors.
Collect Topology: Click the Collect Topology
button to collect NTDP information of
the switch so as to collect the latest network topology.
Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors.
Figure 14-6 Information of the Current Device
14.2.2 NTDP Summary
On this page you can view the NTDP configuration.
226
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Summary to load the following page.
Figure 14-7 NTDP Summary
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
NTDP:
Displays the NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the switch
globally.
NTDP Interval Time: Displays the interval to collect topology information.
NTDP Hops: Displays the hop count the switch topology collects.
NTDP Hop Delay:
Displays the time between the switch receiving NTDP request
packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the
first time.
NTDP Port Delay: Displays the time between the port forwarding NTDP
request
packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets
over.
Port Status
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
NTDP: Displays NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the current port.
227
14.2.3 NTDP Config
On this page you can configure NTDP globally.
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config to load the following page.
Figure 14-8 NTDP Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
NTDP: Select Enable/Disable NTDP for the switch globally.
NTDP Interval Time:
Enter the interval to collect topology information. The default is 1
minute.
NTDP Hops:
Enter the hop count the switch topology collects. The default is 3
hops.
NTDP Hop Delay:
Enter the time between the switch receiving NTDP request
packets and the
switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the
first time. The default is 200 milliseconds.
NTDP Port Delay:
Enter the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets
and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over. The
default is 20 milliseconds.
228
Port Config
Select: Select the desired port for NTDP status configuration.
Port: Displays the port number of the switch.
NTDP: Displays NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the current port.
Enable: Click the Enable button to enable NTDP fea
ture for the port you
select.
Disable: Click the Disable
button to disable NTDP feature for the port you
select.
Note:
NTDP function is effective only when NTDP function is enabled globally and for the port.
14.3 Cluster
A commander switch can recognize and add the candidate switch to a cluster automatically based
on NDP and NTDP. You can manually add the candidate switch to a cluster. If the candidate switch
is successfully added to the cluster, it will get a private IP address assigned by the commander
switch. You can manage and configure the member switch via the commander switch.
The Cluster function can be implemented on Cluster Summary and Cluster Config pages.
14.3.1 Cluster Summary
On this page you can view the status of the current cluster.
Choose the menu Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Summary to load the following page.
For a candidate switch, the following page is displayed:
Figure 14-9 Cluster Summary for Candidate Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global
Cluster: Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.
Cluster Role: Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.
229
For a member switch, the following page is displayed:
Figure 14-10 Cluster Summary for Member Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Cluster: Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.
Cluster Role: Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.
Cluster Name: Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to.
Commander MAC: Displays the MAC address of the commander switch.
For an individual switch, the following page is displayed:
Figure 14-11 Cluster Summary for Individual Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
Cluster: Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.
Cluster Role: Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.
14.3.2 Cluster Config
On this page you can configure the status of the cluster the switch belongs to.
230
Choose the menu Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Config to load the following page.
For a candidate switch, the following page is displayed.
Figure 14-12 Cluster Configuration for Candidate Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Current Role
Role: Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.
Role Change
Individual: Select this o
ption to change the role of the switch to be individual
switch.
For a member switch, the following page is displayed.
Figure 14-13 Cluster Configuration for Member Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Current Role
Role: Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.
Role Change
Individual:
Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual
switch.
231
For an individual switch, the following page is displayed.
Figure 14-14 Cluster Configuration for Individual Switch
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Current Role
Role: Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.
Role Change
Candidate: Select this option to change th
e role of the switch to be candidate
switch.
14.4 Application Example for Cluster Function
Network Requirements
Three switches form cluster, one commander switch (Here take TP-LINK TL-SL5428E as an
example) and two member switches (Here take TP-LINK TL-SG3210/ TL-SG3216/ TL-SG3424/
TL-SG3424P as an example). The administrator manages all the switches in the cluster via the
commander switch.
Port 1 of the commander switch is connecting to the external network, port 2 is connecting to
member switch 1 and port 3 is connecting to member switch 2.
IP pool: 175.128.0.1, Mask: 255.255.255.0.
232
Network Diagram
Figure 14-15 Network diagram
Configuration Procedure
Configure the member switch
Step Operation Description
1
Enable NDP function on the
switch and for port 1
On Cluster→NDP→NDP Config
page, enable NDP
function.
2
Enable NTDP function on the
switch and for port 1
On Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config
page, enable
NTDP function.
Configure the commander switch
Step Operation Description
1
Enable NDP function on the
switch and for port 1, port 2 and
port 3
On Cluster→NDP→NDP Config
page, enable NDP
function.
2
Enable NTDP function on the
switch and for port 1, port 2 and
port 3
On Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config
page, enable
NTDP function.
3
Create a cluster and configure
the related parameters
On Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Config page, configure
the role as Commander and enter the related
information.
IP pool: 175.128.0.1
Mask: 255.255.255.0
233
Step Operation Description
4 Configure the member switch On Cluster→Cluster→Member Config
page, select
the member switch and click the Manage button to log
on to its Web management page.
Or On Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Topology page,
double-click the switch icon to view its detailed
information; click the switch icon and click the Manage
button to log on to the Web management page.
Return to CONTENTS
234
Chapter 15 LLDP
Note:
Only TL-SG3424P supports LLDP function.
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to
advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area
network. The advertised information, including details such as device identification, capabilities
and configuration settings, is represented in TLV (Type/Length/Value) format according to the
IEEE 802.1ab standard, and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU (Link Layer Discovery
Protocol Data Unit). The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB
(Management Information Base), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a
Network Management System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
An IETF Standard MIB, as well as a number of vendor specific MIBs, have been created to
describe a network's physical topology and associated systems within that topology. However,
there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among
stations on the IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP protocol specifies a set. The device running LLDP can
automatically discover and learn about the neighbors, allowing for interoperability between the
network devices of different vendors. This protocol allows two systems running different network
layer protocols to learn about each other.
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension of LLDP
intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The
LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power via MDI, inventory
management, and device location details.
The LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify
troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.
LLDPDU Format
Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequence of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more
optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV, as shown in the figure below. Chassis ID TLV, Port ID
TLV, TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU. Optional TLVs provide
various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network
management.
The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the
particular transmission rate and protocol. In IEEE 802.3 MACs, for example, the maximum
LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic, untagged MAC frame (1500
octets).
LLDP Working Mechanism
1) LLDP Admin Status
The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port, making
it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only,
235
or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs. Four LLDP admin statuses are
supported by each port.
Tx&Rx: the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs.
Rx_Only: the port can receive LLDPDUs only.
Tx_Only: the port can transmit LLDPDUs only.
Disable: the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs.
2) LLDPDU transmission mechanism
If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode, they will advertise local information by
sending LLDPDUs periodically.
If there is a change in the local device, the change notification will be advertised. To
prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to
frequent changes in local device, a transmission delay timer is set by network
management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP
frame transmissions.
If the LLDP admin status of the port is changed from Disable/Rx to TxRx/Tx, the Fast
Start Mechanism will be active, the transmit interval turns to be 1 second, several
LLDPDUs will be sent out, and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular
interval.
3) LLDPDU receipt mechanism
When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode, the device will check the validity of the received
LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs, save this neighbor information to the local device and then set
the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL (Time To Live) TLV. Once the
TTL is 0, this neighbor information will be aged out immediately.
The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL. Hold Multiplier
is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an LLDPDU.
TTL = Hold Multiplier * Transmit Interval.
TLV
TLV refers to Type/Length/Value and is contained in a LLDPDU. Type identifies what kind of
information is being sent, Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is
the actual information to be sent. The basic TLV Format is shown as follows:
Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information
contained in the TLV.
236
The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs.
TLV type TLV Name Description Usage in
LLDPDU
0 End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in LLDPDUs.
Any information following an End Of LLDPDU
TLV shall be ignored.
Mandatory
1 Chassis ID Identifies the Chassis address of the connected
device.
Mandatory
2 Port ID
Identifies the specific port that transmitted the
LLDP frame. When the device does not advertise
MED TLV, this field displays the port name of the
port; when the device advertises MED T
LV, this
field displays the MAC address of the port.
Mandatory
3 Time To Live
Indicates the number of seconds that the
neighbor device is to regard the local information
to be valid.
Mandatory
4 Port Description Identifies the description string of the port. Optional
5 System Name Identifies the system name. Optional
6 System
Description
Identifies the system description. Optional
7 System
Capabilities
Identifies the main functions of the system and
the functions enabled.
Optional
8 Management
Address
Identifies the management IP address, the
corresponding interface number and OID (Object
Identifier). The management IP address is
specified by the user.
Optional
127 Organizationally
Specific
Allows different organizations, such as IEEE
802.1, IEEE 80
2.3, IETF, as well as individual
software and equipment vendors, to define TLVs
that advertise information to remote device.
Optional
Optional TLVs are grouped into two categories including basic management TLV and
Organizationally-specific TLV.
1) Basic Management TLV
A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for
all LLDP implementations.
2) Organizationally Specific TLV
Different organizations have defined various TLVs. For instance, Port VLAN ID TLV, Port and
Protocol VLAN ID TLV, VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802.1,
while MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV, Power Via MDI TLV, Link Aggregation TLV and
Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802.3. Some specific TLVs are for LLDP-MED protocol,
such as LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV, Network Policy TLV, Extended Power-via-MDI TLV,
Hardware Revision TLV and so on.
237
Note:
For detailed introduction of TLV, please refer to IEEE 802.1AB standard and ANSI/TIA-1057.
In TP-LINK switch, the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported.
TLV Type Description
Port Description TLV
The Port Description TLV allows network management to
advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station's port description.
System Capabilities TLV The System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of
the system and whether or not these primary functions are
enabled.
System Description TLV The System Description TLV allows network management to
advertise the system's description, which should include the full
name and version identification of the system's hardware type,
software operating system, and networking software.
System Name TLV
The System Name TLV allows network management to
advertise the system's assigned name, which should be the
system's fully qualified domain name.
Management Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated
with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher
entities to assist discovery by network management.
Port VLAN ID TLV The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise
the port's VLAN identifier (PVID) that will be associated with
untagged or priority tagged frames.
Port And Protocol VLAN ID
TLV
The Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to
advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID.
VLAN Name TLV The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802.1Q-compatible IEEE
802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN
with which it is configured.
Link Aggregation TLV The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable
of being aggregated, wheth
er the link is currently in an
aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port identification of
the aggregation.
MAC/PHY
Configuration/Status TLV
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV identifies: a)The duplex
and bit-rate capability of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node that
is connected to the physical medium; b)The current duplex and
bit-rate settings of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node; c)Whether
these settings are the result of auto-
negotiation during link
initiation or of manual set override action.
Max Frame Size TLV The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame
size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY.
Power Via MDI TLV
The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to
advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the
sending IEEE 802.3 LAN station.
238
The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch, including three
submenus: Basic Config, Device Info, Device Statistics and LLDP-MED.
15.1 Basic Config
LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages.
15.1.1 Global Config
On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally.
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-1 LLDP Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Global Config
LLDP: Enable/disable LLDP function globally.
Parameters Config
Transmit Interval:
Enter the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its
neighbors. The default value is 30.
Hold Multiplier:
Enter a multiplier on the Transmit Interval. It determines the actual
TTL (Time To Live) value used in an LLDPDU. TTL = Hold
Multiplier * Transmit Interval. The default value is 4.
Transmit Delay: Enter a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds
to specify the time for the
local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes
occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently.
The default
value is 2.
Reinit Delay: This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP
status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted.
The default value is 3.
Notification Interval:
Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local
device to network management system. The default value is 5.
239
Fast Start Times: When
the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or Rx_Only)
to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled,
that is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and
several LLDPDUs will be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs
equals this parameter). The default value is 3.
15.1.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP parameters.
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-2 LLDP Port Config
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP Port Config
Port Select: Select the desired port to configure.
Admin Status: Select the port’s LLDP operating mode:
Tx&Rx: send and receive LLDP frames.
Rx_Only: Only receive LLDP frames.
Tx_Only: Only send LLDP frames.
Disable: neither send nor receive LLDP frames.
Notification Mode: Allows you to enable or disable
the ports' SNMP notification. If
enabled, the local device will notify the trap event to SNMP server.
Included TLVs: Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Details: Click the Detail button
to display the included TLVs and select the
desired TLVs.
240
15.2 Device Info
You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and
Neighbor Info pages respectively.
15.2.1 Local Info
On this page you can see all ports' configuration and system information.
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Local Info to load the following page.
Figure 15-3 LLDP Local Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
241
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Local Info
Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding
port.
15.2.2 Neighbor Info
On this page you can get the information of the neighbors.
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Neighbor Info to load the following page.
Figure 15-4 LLDP Neighbor Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Neighbor Info
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Local Port: Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device.
System Name: Displays the system name of the neighbor device.
Chassis ID: Displays the Chassis ID of the neighbor device.
System Description:
Displays the system description of the neighbor device.
Neighbor Port: Displays the port number of the neighbor linking to local port.
Information:
Click Information to display the detailed information of the
neighbor device.
15.3 Device Statistics
You can view the LLDP statistics of the local device through this feature.
242
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Statistics→Statistic Info to load the following page.
Figure 15-5 LLDP Statistic Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Global Statistics
Last Update: Displays latest update time of the statistics.
Total Inserts: Displays the number of neighbors inserted till last update time.
Total Deletes: Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device.
Total Drops: Displays the number of neighbors dropped by local device.
Total Ageouts: Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device.
243
Neighbor Statistics
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Port: Displays local device's port number.
Transmit Total: Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port.
Receive Total: Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port.
Discards: Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port.
Errors: Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port.
Ageouts: Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port.
TLV Discards: Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port.
TLV Unknowns: Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port.
15.4 LLDP-MED
LLDP-MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over
IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network
policy, power via MDI, inventory management, and device location details.
Elements
LLDP-MED Device: Refers to any device which implements this Standard.
LLDP-MED Device Type: LLDP-MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.
Network Connectivity Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device that provides access to the IEEE
802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. Bridge is a Network Connectivity
Device.
Endpoint Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device at the network edge, providing some aspects
of IP communications service, based on IEEE 802 LAN technology. Endpoint Devices may be a
member of any of the Endpoint Device Classes. Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined
Classes: Class I, Class II and Class III.
Generic Endpoint Device (Class I): The most basic class of Endpoint Device.
Media Endpoint Device (Class II): The class of Endpoint Device that supports media stream
capabilities.
Communication Device Endpoint (Class III): The class of Endpoint Device that directly supports
end users of the IP communication system.
TLV Type Function
Network Policy TLV The Network Policy TLV allows both Network Connectivity
Devices and Endpoints to advertise VLAN configuration and
associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set
of specific applications on that port.
244
TLV Type Function
Location Identification TLV The Location Identification TLV provides for advertisement of
location identifier information to Communication Endpoint
Devices, based on configuration of the Network Connectivity
Device it's connected to. You can set the Location
Identification content in Location Identification Parameters. If
Location Identification TLV is included and Location
Identification Parameters isn't set, a default value is used in
Location Identification TLV.
Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV The Extended Power-Via-
MDI TLV is intended to enable
advanced power management between LLDP-MED Endpoint
and Network Connectivity Devices, and it allows
advertisement of fine grained p
ower requirement details,
Endpoint power priority, as well as both Endpoint and Network
Connectivity Device power status.
Inventory TLV
The Inventory TLV set contains seven basic Inventory
management TLVs, that is, Hardware Revision TLV, Firmware
Revision TLV, Software Revision TLV, Serial Number TLV,
Manufacturer Name TLV, Model Name TLV and Asset ID
TLV. If support for any of the TLVs in the Inventory
Management set is implemented, then support for all
Inventory Management TLVs shall be implemented.
LLDP-MED is configured on the Global Config, Port Config, Local Info and Neighbor Info
pages.
15.4.1 Global Config
On this page you can configure the LLDP-MED parameters of the device globally.
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Global Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-6 LLDP-MED Global Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP-MED Parameters Config
Fast Start Count: When LLDP-
MED fast start mechanism is activated, multiple
LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based on this parameter.
Device Class: LLDP-
MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices. In turn,
Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes: Class I,
Class II and Class III. Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device.
245
15.4.2 Port Config
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP-MED parameters.
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Port Config to load the following page.
Figure 15-7 LLDP-MED Port Configuration
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
LLDP-MED Port Config
Port Select: Select the desired port to configure.
LLDP-MED Status: Configure the port's LLDP-MED status:
Enable: Enable the port's LLDP-MED
status, and the port's Admin
Status will be changed to Tx&Rx.
Disable: Disable the port's LLDP-MED status.
Included TLVs: Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Detail: Click the Detail button
to display the included TLVs and select the
desired TLVs.
246
Included TLVs
Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.
Location Identification Parameters
Configure the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.
Emergency
Number:
Emergency number is Emergency Call Service ELIN
identifier,
which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA
or ISDN trunk-based PSAP.
Civic Address: The Civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub-
fields of the
DHCP option for Civic Address based Location Configuration
Information as specified by IETF.
15.4.3 Local Info
On this page you can see all ports' LLDP-MED configuration.
247
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Local Info to load the following page.
Figure 15-8 LLDP-MED Local Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Local Info
Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding
port.
15.4.4 Neighbor Info
On this page you can get the LLDP-MED information of the neighbors.
248
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Neighbor Info to load the following page.
Figure 15-9 LLDP-MED Neighbor Information
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Auto Refresh
Auto Refresh: Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.
Refresh Rate: Specify the auto refresh rate.
Neighbor Info
Port Select: Click the Select button to quick-
select the corresponding port
based on the port number you entered.
Local Port: Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device.
Device Type: Displays the device type of the neighbor.
Application Type: Displays the application type of the neighbor.
Application Type
indicates the primary function of the applications defined for the
network policy.
Local Data Format: Displays the location identification of the neighbor.
Power Type:
Displays the power type of the neighbor device, Power Sourcing
Entity (PSE) or Powered Device (PD).
Information: Click the Information
button to display the detailed information of
the corresponding neighbor.
Return to CONTENTS
249
Chapter 16 Maintenance
Maintenance module, assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch,
provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem.
（1） System Monitor: Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch.
（2） Log: View the configuration parameters of the switch and find out the errors via the Logs.
（3） Device Diagnostics: Cable Test tests the connection status of the cable to locate and
diagnoses the trouble spot of the network.
（4） Network Diagnostics: Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the
route hops from the switch to the destination device.
16.1 System Monitor
System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via
the data graph. The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably
around a specific value. If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases
markedly, please detect whether the network is being attacked.
The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages.
16.1.1 CPU Monitor
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→CPU Monitor to load the following page.
Figure 16-1 CPU Monitor
250
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every
four seconds.
16.1.2 Memory Monitor
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→Memory Monitor to load the following page.
Figure 16-2 Memory Monitor
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate
every four seconds.
16.2 Log
The Log system of switch can record, classify and manage the system information effectively,
providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose
malfunction.
The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels.
Severity Level Description
emergencies 0 The system is unusable.
alerts 1 Action must be taken immediately.
critical 2 Critical conditions
errors 3 Error conditions
warnings 4 Warnings conditions
251
notifications 5 Normal but significant conditions
informational 6 Informational messages
debugging 7 Debug-level messages
Table 16-1 Log Level
The Log function is implemented on the Log Table, Local Log, Remote Log and Backup Log
pages.
16.2.1 Log Table
The switch supports logs output to two directions, namely, log buffer and log file. The information
in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas the information in log
file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off. Log Table displays the system
log information in log buffer.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Log Table to load the following page.
Figure 16-3 Log Table
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Log Info
Index
: Displays the index of the log information.
Time
: Displays the time when the l
og event occurs. The log can get the
correct time after you configure on the System ->System
Info->System Time Web management page.
Module
:
Displays the module which the log information belongs to. You can
select a module from the drop-down list to display the corresponding
log information.
Severity
:
Displays the severity level of the log information. You can select a
severity level to display the log information whose severity level value
is the same or smaller.
Content
: Displays the content of the log information.
252
Note:
1. The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity. The higher the information severity
is, the lower the corresponding level is.
2. This page displays logs in the log buffer, and at most 512 logs are displayed.
16.2.2 Local Log
Local Log is the log information saved in switch. By default, all system logs from level_0 to level_6
are saved in log buffer. On this page, you can set the output channel for logs.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Local Log to load the following page.
Figure 16-4 Local Log
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Local Log Config
Select
: Select the desired entry to configure the corresponding local log.
L
og Buffer:
Indicates the RAM for saving system log. The inforamtion in the
log buffer is displayed on the Log Table page. It will be lost when
the switch is restarted.
Log File
:
Indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The inforamtion
in the log
file will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can
be exported on the Backup Log page.
Severity
:
Specify the severity level of the log information output to each
channel. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level
value will be output.
Status
: Enable/Disable the channel.
16.2.3 Remote Log
Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server. Log Server is to
centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the
whole network.
253
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Remote Log to load the following page.
Figure 16-5 Log Host
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Log Host
Index
: Displays the index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log
hosts.
Host IP
: Configure the IP for the log host.
UDP Port
:
Displays the UDP port used for receiving/sending log
information. Here we use the standard port 514.
Severity
: Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log
host. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value
will be sent to the corresponding log host.
Status
: Enable/Disable the log host.
Note:
The Log Server software is not provided. If necessary, please download it on the Internet.
16.2.4 Backup Log
Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device
diagnosis and statistics analysis. When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system, you
can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis
after the switch is restarted.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Backup Log to load the following page.
Figure 16-6 Backup Log
254
The following entry is displayed on this screen:
Backup Log
Backup Log
: Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer.
Note:
It will take a few minutes to backup the log file. Please wait without any operation.
16.3 Device Diagnostics
This switch provides Cable Test function for device diagnostics.
16.3.1 Cable Test
Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, which
facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network.
Choose the menu Maintenance→Device Diagnostics→Cable Test to load the following page.
Figure 16-7 Cable Test
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Cable Test
Port
: Select the port for cable testing.
Pair
: Displays the Pair number.
Status
: Displays the connection status of the cable connected to the port.
The
test results of the cable include normal, close, open, short,
impedance
or unknown.
Length
:
If the connection status is normal, here displays the length range of
the cable.
Error
: If the connection status is close, open or
impedance, here displays the
error length of the cable.
255
Note:
1. The Length displayed here is the length of pair cable not that of the physical cable.
2. The test result is just for your reference.
16.4 Network Diagnostics
This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network diagnostics.
16.4.1 Ping
Ping test function, testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network,
facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the
network malfunctions.
Choose the menu Maintenance → Network Diagnostics → Ping to load the following page.
Figure 16-9 Ping
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Ping Config
Destination IP
: Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test.
Both IPv4
and IPv6 are supported.
Ping Times
:
Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. The
default value is recommended.
Data Size
: Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing. The def
ault
value is recommended.
Interval
:
Specify the interval to send ICMP request packets. The default value
is recommended.
256
16.4.2 Tracert
Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the
source to destination of the test data. When malfunctions occur to the network, you can locate
trouble spot of the network with this tracert test.
Choose the menu Maintenance → Network Diagnostics → Tracert to load the following page.
Figure 16-10 Tracert
The following entries are displayed on this screen:
Tracert Config
Destination IP
: Enter the IP address of the destination device
. Both IPv4 and IPv6 are
supported.
Max Hop
: Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data c
an pass
through.
Return to CONTENTS
257
Appendix A: Specifications
Standards
IEEE802.3 10Base-T Ethernet
IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/100Base-FX Fast Ethernet
IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE802.3z 1000Base-X Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE802.3x Flow Control
IEEE802.1p QoS
IEEE802.1q VLAN
IEEE802.1X Port-based Access Authentication
IEEE 802.3 af/at (for TL-SG3424P)
Transmission Rate
Ethernet: 10Mbps HD，20Mbps FD
Fast Ethernet: 100Mbps HD，200Mbps FD
Gigabit Ethernet: 2000Mbps FD
Transmission Medium
10Base-T: UTP/STP of Cat. 3 or above
100Base-TX: UTP/STP of Cat. 5 or above
100Base-FX: MMF or SMF SFP Module (Optional)
1000Base-T: 4-pair UTP (≤100m) of Cat. 5, Cat. 5e, Cat.6 or above
1000Base-X: MMF or SMF SFP Module (Optional)
LED
For TL-SG3210:
PWR, SYS, 10/100/1000M, 1000M
For TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424:
Power System,1000Mbps, Link/Act
For TL-SG3424P:
Speed, Power, System, PoE, PoE Max, Port Status
Transmission Method Store and Forward
Packets Forwarding Rate
10BASE-T：14881pps/port
100BASE-TX：148810pps/port
1000Base-T：1488095pps/port
258
Appendix B: Load Software Using FTP
If there is something wrong with the firmware of the switch and the switch cannot be launched, you
can load firmware to the switch via FTP function. FTP (File Transfer Protocol), a protocol in the
application layer, is mainly used to transfer files between the remote server and the local PCs. It is
a common protocol used in the IP network for files transfer.
1. Hardware Installation
Figure B-1
1） Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch.
2） Connect the Console port of the PC to the switch.
3） Save the firmware of the switch in the shared file of FTP server. Please write down the
user name, password and the firmware name.
2. Configure the Hyper Terminal
After the hardware installation, please take the following steps to configure the hyper terminal of
the management PC to manage the switch.
1） Open the PC's terminal simulation program (such as Hyperterminal program), configure
the following parameters:
Bits per second：38400bps
Data bits：8
Parity：None
Stop bits：1
Flow control：None
2） The prompt “TL-SG3424>” will appear after pressing the Enter button as Figure B-2
shown. It indicates that you can use the CLI now.
260
Figure B-2 Log on the Switch
3. Download Firmware via bootUtil menu
To download firmware to the switch via FTP function, you need to enter into the bootUtil menu of
the switch and take the following steps.
1） Connect the console port of the PC to the console port of the switch and open hyper
terminal. Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch.
2） Power off and restart the switch. When you are prompted that “Press CTRL-B to enter the
bootUtil” in the hyper terminal, please press CTRL-B key to enter into bootUtil menu
shown as the figure below.
Figure B-3 bootUtil Menu
As the prompt is displayed for a short time, you are suggested not to release the CTRL-B key
until you enter into bootUtil menu after powering on the switch.
3） After entering into bootUtil menu, please firstly configure the IP parameters of the switch.
The format is:
ifconfig ip xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx mask 255.255.255.0 gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
For example: Configure the IP address as 10.10.70.22, mask as 255.255.255.0 and
gateway as10.10.70.1. The detailed command is shown as the figure below. Enter the
command and press Enter.
[TP-LINK] : ifconfig ip 10.10.70.22 mask 255.255.255.0 gateway 10.10.70.1
261
4） Configure the parameters of the FTP server which keeps the upgrade firmware. Later you
can download the firmware to the switch from the FTP server. The format of the command
is: ftp host xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx user xxxxx pwd xxxxx file xxxxxx.bin.
Take the following parameters of the FTP server as an example. The IP address of the
FTP server is 10.10.70.146; the user name and password for login to the FTP server are
both 123; the name of the upgrade firmware is TL-SG3424_up.bin. The detailed
command is shown as the following figure. Enter the command and press Enter.
[TP-LINK] : ftp host 10.10.70.146 user 123 pwd 123 file TL-SG3424_up.bin
5） Enter the upgrade command and press Enter to upgrade the firmware. After a while, the
prompt “You can only use the port 1 to upgrade” will display in the hyper terminal shown
as the following figure.
[TP-LINK] : upgrade
You can only use the port 1 to upgrade.
6） When the prompt “Are you sure to upgrade the firmware[Y/N]:” displays, please enter Y to
start upgrade or enter N to quit upgrade shown as the following figure. The # icon
indicates it is upgrading. After upgrading, the [TP-LINK] command will display.
Are you sure to upgrade the firmware[Y/N] : y
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #
[TP-LINK] :
7） Please power off and restart the switch shown as the following figure. Now you are in the
User EXEC mode and can manage the switch via CLI command.
[TP-LINK] :
Press CTRL-B to enter the bootUtil
Starting . . .
TL-SG3424>
Return to CONTENTS
262
Appendix C: Glossary
Access Control List (ACL)
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each
packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP address
information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files, and the name
of the boot file.
Class of Service (CoS)
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and then placing
them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted
round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower-level queues. Priority
may be set according to the port default, the packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port
number, or DSCP priority bit.
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based on network
policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits
are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then into the output queues.
Domain Name Service (DNS)
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP
is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for
any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and password is requested by the switch,
and then passed to an authentication server (e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is
implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication standard.
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN
members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work
automatically over a Spanning Tree network.
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
The GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in
GARP Applications (GARP Participants) to register and de-register attribute values with other
GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN. The definition of the attribute types, the values that they
can carry, and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered, are specific to
the operation of the GARP Application concerned.
263
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP requires that
any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802.1p standard.
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.
IEEE 802.1D
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the Spanning Tree
Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It allows switches to
assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a standard way for VLANs to
communicate across switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The standard uses
packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on
the tagged priority value.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID
and password for authentication.
IEEE 802.3ac
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex links.
(Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services. If there is
more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the
“querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership.
IGMP Snooping
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast routers and
IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.
IGMP Query
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the device that
asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong.
The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork.
IP Multicast Filtering
It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group.
Multicast Switching
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services which no attached
host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group.
264
Layer 2
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to the
hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses.
Link Aggregation
See Port Trunk.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on another
device.
Management Information Base (MIB)
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that contains
information about a specific device.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit machines
and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a one-way hash function,
meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits, also called a message
digest.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate
in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet
and to national time standards via wire or radio.
Port Authentication
See IEEE 802.1X.
Port Mirroring
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a
logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively.
Port Trunk
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single
high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical links.
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to
control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the polling required
in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions, including specific error
types.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required
by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
265
Secure Shell (SSH)
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can authenticate users
with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between management clients and the
switch.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management
services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received
via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in complicated or
backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest
available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network.
Telnet
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer
protocol.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as the underlying
transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP
packets – connection-less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is
useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of
their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup
with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located
on the same LAN.
Return to CONTENTS
266